JP2020062130A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To appropriately take measures against a defect.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game control means for controlling a game comprehensively, and performance control means for controlling a performance on the basis of performance information transmitted from the game control means. The game control means can periodically transmit to the performance control means game machine state information including information on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the game machine, as performance information. The performance control means includes performance information storage means having a performance information storage area for storing the received performance information, and when new performance information is received in a state where there is no space in the performance information storage area due to unprocessed performance information, the oldest performance information is discarded and new performance information is stored.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

  There is known a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result. In such a gaming machine, the information is transmitted from the game control means for controlling the game as a whole to the sub-control means for controlling the effect and payout (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-110126, A

  In the sub-control means, the information received from the game control means is temporarily stored, but if an abnormality such as a delay in processing occurs in the sub-control means, an area for storing the information received from the game control means is created. There is a possibility that a problem may occur in which the information is filled up and new information cannot be received. An object of the present invention is to appropriately deal with a defect.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, generates a state advantageous to the player.
A game control means for controlling the game as a whole,
And effect control means for controlling effect based on effect information transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means,
As the effect information, it is possible to periodically transmit the game machine state information including information regarding the occurrence of an abnormality in the game machine to the effect control means,
The effect control means,
The production information storage unit having a production information storage area for storing the received production information,
When new production information is received in a state where there is no space in the production information storage area due to the unprocessed production information, the oldest production information is discarded and the new production information is stored. And

  According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flow chart explaining starting mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 1 normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a falling lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process and a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining a decoration special figure command table. It is the program list which shows the program structure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a figure explaining a variable time value table. It is a figure explaining a fluctuation pattern number correction table. It is a program list which shows the program structure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining time shortening change frequency update processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 process during a change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining the process during special character 2 display. It is a flow chart explaining the process during special character 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / during-interval processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / during-interval processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end setting process 1 and a big hit end setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining the game machine state command transmission processing. It is a figure explaining the structure of a gaming machine state command. It is a figure showing an example of a data structure of ROM which a game control device has. It is a figure explaining a big hit judgment. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetching variable system command process. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart explaining timer interruption processing of a payment control device. It is a flow chart explaining command reception processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of command reception processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout device control start determination process. It is a flow chart explaining pay-out busy signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining an outline of processing of a command.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable / closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp, the LED, etc. (for example, red). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b inform the user of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for alerting | reporting abnormalities in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device are provided. Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  In addition, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, a player rotates the operation unit 24 to cause the ball-striking launcher to shoot a gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. To do. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 to produce an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a plate-shaped game board body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 on the front surface of the game board body 80. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a hitting ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down in the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case 40, which forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game, is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (CRT). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image. For example, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) or a character that produces a special figure variable display game, Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. And a possible stage portion 620 are provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 620 are easy to win in the starting winning opening 36.
Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

  Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right part of the center case 40, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (not shown), and this movable member always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is a predetermined result, the universal ball 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device causes the game ball to easily flow into the regular variation winning device 37 (the open state (game). Can be changed to an advantageous condition for the person).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal variation winning device 37 is a so-called Vero type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding forwards and backwards (sliding) by the universal solenoid 37c. The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variation winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction in which it falls toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, or the ordinary electric prize solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-type ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape.
Further, the normal variation winning device 37 may allow the game ball to win even when the movable member is in the closed state, and in the closed state, the game ball may be harder to win than in the open state.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the universal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there are a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the upper special winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by an opening / closing member (not shown) moving forward and backward (sliding). According to the result of the special figure variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 converts the upper special winning opening from the closed state to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

  Inside the upper special winning opening (winning area), a specific area into which a game ball can flow is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 3) so as to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the specific area. ) Is provided with a lever member. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the fact that the specific area switch 38d detects the game ball, the advantageous state for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in this embodiment, a high-probability state occurs after the special game state ends). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variation winning device 38.

  Further, inside the upper special winning opening, there is provided a remaining ball outlet switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variation winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper special winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper special winning opening), and the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharging opening switch 38e. It is possible to confirm that all the game balls in the upper prize hole have been discharged by matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize hole), basically until this confirmation is completed. Will not open a new upper prize hole.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, to the right of the starting winning opening 36, a second special variation winning prize that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower major winning opening) 39 is provided. In the second special variation winning device 39, an opening / closing member (not shown) moves forward / backward (slides) to convert the lower special winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow. The second special variation winning device 39 converts the lower special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the lower special winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variation winning device 39 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

  In the game area 32 below the start winning port 36, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning port or the like is provided. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed on the lower right corner of the game board body 80 outside the game area 32. A collective display device 50 is provided.

  The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure change display portion) 51 and special figure 2 change display for a special figure 1 change display game, which is composed of a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) Special figure 2 indicator for game (second special figure variation display section) 52, first memory display section 53 for informing starting number of special figure 1 variation display game composed of LED lamps, and LED lamp And a second memory display unit 54 for informing the number of remembered starting memories of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 is advantageous to the player among the round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38 and 39), left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying how to hit (how to hit corresponding to the game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. There is. In addition, the collective display device 50, a probability state display unit that indicates that the probability state of the big hit is high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a display that lights up when the big hit occurs and notifies the big hit occurrence A part (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, a public figure display unit 58 for displaying the general figure fluctuation display game, a memory display unit 59 for informing the number of starting memories of the general figure fluctuation display game, and a time saving state which lights up when a time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

  The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed at the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segment is also driven to blink. It is configured such that the fact that it is fluctuating is displayed so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment (8th segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the out, and the result of the game is In the case of “win”, the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or symbol) other than the off result mode (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of unsuccessful balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls into the starting winning port 36, which is a variation start condition of the special map 1 display device 51. , It lights up (flashes) and is displayed.
The second memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the plurality of LEDs among the number of winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52. It is displayed by turning it off and turning it on (blinking).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display device.

The first gaming state display section 56 is composed of LED lamps and the like. For example, when the player is in a gaming state in which the left hitting is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and left. When the player is in a game state in which right-handedness is more advantageous than hitting (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of a big hit is a high probability state (probability change state). In the case of, all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having the same, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

  The power supply device 400 has a normal power supply unit including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V, DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the power failure to the game control device 100, A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. In other words, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about a game even when a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and the game can be restarted based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed, and have already been derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a non-display mode. Then, for example, a state in which the variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display, and is determined before the displayed result is derived and displayed. The display state when at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display areas on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

  Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects having different possibility of deriving the special result mode (different expected values), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern (various types in the special figure variation display game). Random pattern generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the reach and the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure variable display game And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result (big hit, small hit or out) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, Based on the number of start-up memories and the like, any one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit to drive a payout ball according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the big winning opening switch 38a in the first special variation winning device 38, the big winning opening switch 39a in the second special variation winning device 39, the gate switch in the universal start gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a residual ball outlet switch 38e arranged in the first special variation winning device 38, an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished the game. 0V-5V, which is connected to a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches. Interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts the positive logic signal is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is removed from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as that, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. To be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

  Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the gaming machine 10, and a gaming machine. The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of 10 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become.

  Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is provided with a key hole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. The setting key switch 152 is turned on when it is turned to the second position and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

  The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability value that will be a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, you can select the probability setting value to which the probability value that will be a special result is assigned in the special figure variation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared.

  When selecting the probability setting value, the probability setting value is set by turning on the power of the game machine while operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. Can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability setting value changing mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability setting value information while operating the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value changing mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode), and other than that. Displays the calculated base value and character ratio.

In addition, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is the performance display device. Although it is displayed on 153, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value cannot be changed is set. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is configured to display the probability setting value by numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability setting value may be used. Further, other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are transferred from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also designed to be supplied to a test-firing test device (not shown) via the device. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (enable) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in a signal based on the above) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there are restrictions on the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test-inspection test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as they are are once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. As an error signal indicating that the machine is not in the game control state, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-shooting test apparatus through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first special winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variation winning device 38, and a second big winning opening solenoid (large for opening the second special variation winning device 39). The winning port solenoid 2) 39b, the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variation winning device 38, and the universal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variation winning device 37 are output and are currently selected. It is a port for outputting the display data of the performance display device 153 displaying the probability setting value.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON / OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example, and can display information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the universal electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to an external information terminal board 71. The fourth driver 138d for output and the display data of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134. Fifth driver 138e is provided for receiving a data signal to generate a drive signal output. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e is supplied with DC5V as the power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V.
Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line according to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit / receive data to / from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

  In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switches 38a, 39a, the gate For the switch 34a, a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) is used that includes a coil for magnetic detection and uses a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil to detect a game ball. Has been done. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the main frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 etc. are micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321, which is a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 which is a time counting means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, light a decorative lamp, and drive the motor. And drive control of the solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a waiting state for receiving the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I / F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) As. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. That detects the ON / OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided which has a function of detecting a signal of the above and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the tone generator LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signals) and put them in a reset state. Further, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

  That is, the effect control device 300 is a sub-control unit that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100, and controls the effect based on the effect information (command) transmitted from the game control device 100. It forms the production control means. In addition, the CPU 311 forms an effect calculation processing unit that is an operation processing unit that performs an operation process for effect, and an effect information storage unit having an effect information storage area in which the RAM 322 stores the received effect information.

  Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The payout control device 200 includes a CPU unit 210 having a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 including an amusement chip (IC), an input unit 220 having an input port, an output port, a driver, and the like like the game microcomputer 111. The output unit 230, the CPU unit 210, the input unit 220, and the data bus 240 connecting the output unit 230 are provided.

  The CPU unit 210 includes a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator that generates a reference clock of a random number generation circuit). ) 213 and the like.

  The payout microcomputer 211 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 211A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 211B, and a RAM (random access memory) 211C that can be read and written at any time. Further, the payout microcomputer 211 generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 211A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 213. It is equipped with a clock generator.

  The CPU 211A executes the control program in the ROM 211B, and a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on the payout command (prize ball command) from the game control device 100 and the input of a ball rental request signal from the card unit 600. , Ball rental) is discharged from the payout device.

  The ROM 211B stores non-changing information (program, fixed data, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 211C is used as a work area of the CPU 211A and a storage area of various signals during game control. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 211B or the RAM 211C.

  The input unit 220 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 221. The proximity I / F 221 is connected to a frame radio wave sensor 84 provided on the front frame 12 for detecting the emission of radio waves and a payout ball detection switch 81 for detecting a game ball to be paid out. A negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch is converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. In this way, the proximity I / F 221 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 221 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V necessary for normal IC operation. Has become.

  Since the input range of the proximity I / F 221 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is detached from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as the above, and output the abnormality detection signal 1.

  The output of the proximity I / F 221 is supplied to the input port 223 and read into the payout microcomputer 211 via the data bus 240. Further, in the input port 223, a shoot ball out switch 82 for detecting a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow for detecting that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full) A detection signal of the switch 83 and a communication signal from the card unit 600 connected via the photo coupler 226 are also input. Further, the input port 223 also receives an operation signal from an error release switch 227 provided in the payout control device 200 and for releasing an error caused by detection of radio waves or the like. Further, the detection signal of the payout ball detection switch 81 out of the output of the proximity I / F 221 is also supplied to an unillustrated test-firing test device via the relay board 90.

  The data held in the input port 223 can be read by the payout microcomputer 211 decoding the address assigned to the input port 223 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level).

  In addition, the payout control device 200 relays a touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24, which is output from the launch control device 700, and outputs the relayed touch switch signal to the game control device 100. In addition, the payout control device 200 relays the launch permission signal output from the game control device 100 and outputs it to the launch control device 700.

  Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 225 for inputting a reset signal from the power supply device 400 and a payout command (prize ball command) from the game control device 100 to the payout microcomputer 211 and the like. The Schmitt buffer 225 has a function of removing noise from these input signals.

  The reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 225 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the payout microcomputer 211 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 230. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input port 223 of the input section 220. The data set in each port of the output unit 230 by the pay-out microcomputer 211 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the use microcomputer 211 is discarded by resetting the payout microcomputer 211.

  The payout control device 200 is supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, and the payout control device 200 and the payout motor 91 driven by the payout control device 200. Being able to operate electronic components. Furthermore, the DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is also supplied to the firing control device 700 via the payout control device 200.

  The output unit 230 includes a first output port 231 that is connected to the data bus 240 and outputs the firing permission signal 2 as a data signal to the firing control device 700. The firing permission signal generated by the game control device 100 and the firing permission signal 2 generated by the payout control device 200 are input to the firing control device 700, and at least one of them outputs a firing prohibition signal. When it is outputting, it is set to the prohibited state, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. Further, the first output port 231 also outputs a data signal for controlling the error status display device 250 provided in the payout control device 200 and displaying an error generated in the payout control device 200 by a lighting state of an LED.

  The output unit 230 is also connected to the data bus 240 and includes a second output port 232 for outputting a data signal to the game control device 100. From the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100 via this second output port, a frame radio wave incorrect signal indicating that the frame radio wave sensor 84 provided on the front frame 12 has detected a radio wave, the payout control device 200. A payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are output.

  Further, the output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240, and a third output port 233 for outputting an operation data signal of the payout motor 91 of the payout device, a data signal to an external device, and a data signal to the card unit 600. Is provided.

  Further, the output unit 230 is provided with a first driver (drive circuit) 236 that receives an operation data signal of the payout motor 91 output from the third output port 233 and generates and outputs a motor drive signal. In addition, an external information signal supplied from the third output port 233 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal board 71, and a data signal supplied from the third output port 233 to the card unit 600 is output. Two drivers 237 are provided. The required power supply voltage is supplied to these drivers.

  The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example, and can display information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a photocoupler 238 for transmitting a data signal to the card unit 600.

  Further, the output unit 230 is configured to be mountable with a fourth output port 234 which is connected to the data bus 240 and outputs various signals to the test-shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) via the relay board 70. The fourth output port 234 is a component that is not mounted on the payout control device 200 of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a gaming shop.

  Further, the output unit 230 is provided with a photocoupler 239 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 239 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the payout microcomputer 211 can transmit / receive data to / from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the payout microcomputer 211 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, a port such as the input port 223 is not provided.

  That is, the payout control device 200 constitutes a sub-control unit that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100, and controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control device 100. It forms the payout control means. Further, the CPU 211A forms a payout calculation processing unit that is a calculation processing unit that performs a calculation process for payout, and the RAM 211C forms a payout information storage unit having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information.

  FIG. 6 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the jackpot type distribution probability when the big hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure variation display game. When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in the present specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

The value of the big hit probability (probability value), which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common in special figure 1 and special figure 2, and the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are respectively The probability value is as shown in FIG.
Note that in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, but different probability values are set. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the same probability value is assigned to “setting 1” and “setting 2” as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are set. It may be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, and “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of stages of the probability value in the low probability state is not limited as long as it can be switched in multiple stages. In addition, the same probability value may be assigned as a probability value in the low probability state to all of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

In addition, the effect distribution and the like may be different between the “setting 1” and the “setting 2”, which have the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, and “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, six probability setting values (“setting 1” for three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state)) "-" Setting 6 ") are assigned, but three probability setting values (for example," Setting 1 "-" Setting 3 ") are assigned to three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example," Setting 6 ") are assigned. "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may not be used.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in a special game state based on a big hit (first special game state), a game ball flows into a specific region (probability change operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d. By doing (passing V), it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and becomes a low probability state when winning the falling lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 6 (b).
In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 6 (c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not overlapped and won. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0. May be provided in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, when the small hits are provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or in the special figure 2 rather than the special figure 1. May be higher, or the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

In addition, FIG. 6D shows jackpot types selectable between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
There are three types of big hits (first special result) in the special display 1 variable display game: 10R certainty change big hits, 4R certainty change big hits, and 10R normal big hits. Similarly, there are three types of big hits (first special results) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R certainty change big hits, 4R certainty change big hits, and 10R normal big hits. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. The number of each jackpot type shows the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is likely to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the special game state ends. , Normal indicates that the game ball is unlikely to flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) and is unlikely to be in the high probability state (probability change state) after the special game state ends.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variation winning devices 38, 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the actual number of rounds + the number of rounds for which the opening time of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 is short and the winning control is not actually performed). May be.

Further, the first special result may be provided in which the possibility of the game ball flowing into the specific area is lower than that of the probability variation big hit, but the possibility of the game ball flowing into the specific area is higher than that of the normal big hit.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is established depending on whether or not a game ball flows into a specific area (probability variation operation area), so even if the jackpot type is a probable variation, it is specified. If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur. Even if the big hit type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

7 (a) to 7 (c) show the manner of opening in each round in each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 10R probability variation big hit, V first long opening is performed in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round. V Yes Long opening is an opening mode in which it is highly possible that a game ball will flow into a specific area (probability change operation area). Then, after the second round, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and V-less long opening is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7B, in the 4R probability variation big hit, V first long opening is performed in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and a specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round. Then, from the second round to the fourth round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific region is not opened, and the V-long opening is performed, and after the fifth round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. Do not open the specific area. Do not open V. Short open. The V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility of a game ball flowing into the special winning opening is lower than that of the V-free long opening. That is, the V-less long opening is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and the winning ball is not actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 7C, in the 10R normal jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a V-shaped short-circuit opening for opening a specific area (probability change operation area) is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball will flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) with V, and the short opening is an opening mode that is lower than with V and the long opening. After the second round, the V-free long opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 is performed.
The game balls can be allowed to flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) only in the V-long open and V-short open in the first round. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is a round in which the game ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the specific round may be repeated a plurality of times such as the first round and the fifth round.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the V-free long opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 msec has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any one of the conditions of winning the game ball of (1) is established, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t12). After that, the processing time for processing the remaining balls of the special winning opening is started (t12), the interval time is started when the processing time of the remaining winning balls for the special winning opening is completed (t13), and the next round is started when the interval time is completed (t14). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the V-long opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and the game ball cannot enter, and when the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can enter. Becomes In addition, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is valid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which the specific area switch 38d is treated as invalid even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 m seconds after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened will flow into the specific area.

  When 200 msec has passed from the start of the round, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, after the elapse of 2700 msec, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened again (t35), either the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won. When the conditions are satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t39). After that, the processing time for processing the remaining balls of the special winning opening is started (t39), the interval time is started when the processing time of the remaining winning balls for the special winning opening is completed (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time is completed (t42). . In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  After the second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d becomes effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is a sufficiently long time of opening, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so that the game ball almost certainly flows into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the type of jackpot is probable, a high probability state is almost certainly obtained.

  Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept in the ON state for a predetermined time even after the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variation winning device 38 just before closing. The game balls that have been played can also flow into a specific area. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing. When all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41), the operation is ended, and the specific area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the gaming balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are the upper major winning hole remaining ball processing time. If not completely discharged, and if all are discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the lever solenoid 38f will be in the OFF state at the completion of the discharge and operate. And the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the gaming balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are the upper major winning hole remaining ball processing time. If not all are discharged by the end (t43) of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43). Then, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is completed. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

  As shown in FIG. 8C, in the V-opened short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variation winning device 38 in the V-opened long opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round is ended based on (t54). Since the opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the specific area. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the type of jackpot is normal.

  It should be noted that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid / invalid switching of the specific area switch 38d perform the same operation as in the case of the V open long opening as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 ( t55 to t63). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even after the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. Then, the operation ends and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. Also, if all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF at the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). The specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) and the operation is completed.

  In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 in the V presence long opening shown in FIG. 8B (t31 to t34) and the first special variation in the V presence short opening shown in FIG. 8C. The opening (t51 to t54) of the winning device 38 is set to an opening time such that at least one game ball can be won in the first special variation winning device 38.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (d), in the V-less short opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t71), and a 200 msec openable time has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any one of the conditions of winning the game ball of () is established, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of winnings, which are the closing conditions, are generated, and most of the time, the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper special winning opening is started (t72), the interval time is started when the processing time for remaining upper special winning balls is ended (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time is ended (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  Further, FIG. 7D shows an opening state in the second special game state (a special game state based on a small hit). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and when the small hit fanfare time is finished, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, and the openable time of 1600 msec has passed or a predetermined number (for example, The second special variation winning device 39 is closed when any of the conditions of winning nine (9) game balls is established. After that, when the small hit remaining ball processing time is started and the small hit remaining ball processing time is ended, the small hit ending time is started, and when the small hit ending time is ended, the second special game state is ended. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of opening / closing modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special game state, and in that case, which opening / closing mode is set (adopted) is determined based on the small hit symbol, for example. ..

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (shift) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9: is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode that is controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, the main in the game state. A main starting area which is a starting area to be aimed at, a main variation special figure which is a kind of special figure variation display game to be executed mainly, and a shooting direction of a game ball are defined.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, left-handed striking can be aimed at the starting winning opening 36, and right-hand striking can be aimed at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is possible to select a target starting area depending on the intention of the player. Further, in each gaming state, it is designed assuming that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game mainly advances the game, and the player plays the game in accordance with this design. As the game progresses, it is advantageous for the player to play the game mainly in one special figure variation display game which is determined to be the main one in the design. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

  In the normal gaming state ST1, the special map probability is a low probability state, and there is no normal electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no special map display game or normal game. This is a state in which there is no time reduction to reduce the variation time of the figure variation display game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be a main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be an irregular variation. In the normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win a small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. .

  The second specific game state ST3 is a state in which the special figure probability is basically low. However, when a game ball flows into a specific area (probability change operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 (in the case of V passage) in a special game state based on a normal jackpot, the state is a high probability state. In addition, there is a usual electric power support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is support for Boden, it will also be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special map variable display game or the general map variable display game. The production mode that defines the production mode is the chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning a prize device 37, and the aiming direction of the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is rightward. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed as a main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed as an irregular variation.

  In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no normal electric power support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variation display game. It is in a state where there is a reduction in the time required to reduce the fluctuation time. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the small hit RUSH. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning a prize device 37, and the aiming direction of the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is rightward. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed as a main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed as an irregular variation.

In the present embodiment, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure variation display game in the state with the universal communication support (normal figure probability) is the same probability as the state without the universal communication support (normal probability). However, in the state where there is universal communication support, the universal figure probability can be set to a high probability (typical figure high probability state) higher than the normal probability (typical figure low probability state).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the state in which there is no ordinary electric power support means that the ordinary variable prize device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is shorter than that in the state where the ordinary electric prize support is provided. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and a right variation is performed to make a normal variation winning device 37. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at The special display 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special display 1 variable display game (in the case of the present embodiment, the small hit probability is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since the probability of doing is high, a small hit frequently occurs in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state with the universal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the state without normal electric power support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. In the special game state based on the small hit, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 7 (d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are normal variation prizes. The device 37 is won and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, a small hit frequently occurs, but it is difficult to increase the player's ball with the small hit.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are the normal variation prize. Without winning the prize in the device 37, it flows down to the second special variable prize device 39 arranged below the normal variable prize device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, a small hit occurs frequently and the player's ball is increased, so the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

  Of these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is in a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game state ST1 because it has a universal electric power support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high-probability state, and is a state in which the player's ball is increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. Therefore, the player is more likely than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. It is in an advantageous state.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, consuming the prescribed number of games, and winning the falling lottery that is the transition lottery to the low probability state. . Basically, the probability variation big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the first special game state, the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific region switch is performed. When it is detected at 38d (when there is V passage), after the end of the first special game state, the process moves to the first specific game state ST2. On the other hand, if the probability variation big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage) In the case of), after the end of the first special game state, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the case where there is no V passage in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (with a special figure low probability The second specific game state ST3) is entered. On the other hand, if the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and there is V passage in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability The second specific game state ST3) is entered.
In the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, the normal game state ST1 is entered. In addition, when the falling lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a win (special result). Further, when the first special game state, which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special game state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by a game ball (pachinko ball) being launched from a hitting ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , A winning prize 36, an ordinary variation winning device 37, a first special variation winning device 38 or a second special variation winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 It is discharged from 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, or the second special variation winning device 39, the number according to the type of the winning opening Prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left-side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize at the provided general winning opening 35, and by launching a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called right hitting), the universal figure starting gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the first special variation winning prize. The device 38, the second special variation winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged to the right of the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed at.

  Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of memory for starting normal operation is the upper limit (for example, 4) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the operation start gate 34. If less than), the number of ordinary figure starting memory is added (+1) and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of this figure start prize is displayed on the figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, the universal figure starting memory stores a hit determination random number value (per random number value) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be done.

  Then, if there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not being executed, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the hit determination random value stored in the first-used figure start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit state of the figure change display game. Then, the processing for starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

  In addition, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the public figure display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general figure variable display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the given order, the processing of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the public figure display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are normally used as the identification information, and this is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed to display the result. It may be configured.

  When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the regular pattern display unit 58 stops and displays the lighting pattern which is a special result mode, and also activates the universal electric solenoid 37c to move the movable member of the ordinary variation winning device 37. Control to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the general-picture display unit 58 as a result mode of the off-going.

  The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory which is the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). In addition to being stored, the second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored within a predetermined upper limit (for example, four). On the basis of the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random numbers. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. The number of memories of the start memory is the first memory display section 53 (special figure 1 reserved display) or the second memory display section 54 (special figure 2 reserved display) for informing the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50. And the display device 41 of the center case 40 is also displayed as a decoration special figure starting memory display.

  The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first starting memory, and the special figure 2 display device 52 (based on the second starting memory). The special variation 2 variation display game is played on the second variation display device). Although the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has the first special result (big hit). In such a case, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result (outcome result) other than the special result. In addition, when one special figure fluctuation display game is the second special result (small hit) during execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, the other one until the special game state based on the small hit ends. The special figure variable display game is interrupted.

  That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It constitutes a first execution control means for controlling. In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting prize area). It constitutes second execution control means for performing execution control.

  In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, after performing variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode (the small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37.

  In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hit is high probability It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed by having support. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

  Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decoration special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) is variably displayed on the display device 41 The display game is now running. The decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decoration special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variable display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

  That is, the display variation display game in which the display device 41 variably displays the ornament identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) ( A decorative variable display means for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be equipped with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but is special in the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 2, a long variation is selected as a variation pattern of the variation display game, which has a very long variation time (about 10 minutes). As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win the small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit left and hit the start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The time for long fluctuation is set to about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). In addition, the time of long fluctuation may be changed according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a miss or a small hit, a long variation of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game, When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a long variation of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 10, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a top address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

  After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, a sub-control unit (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the sub control device before the sub control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up before the sub control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Wait for the power to be cut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination as to whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of power failure due to noise, etc. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents when the power was last turned off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process (step X8) of determining whether a power failure has occurred. When the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time is over, access is permitted to the read / write memory (RWM) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S10). X11), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the gaming microcomputer is set. A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Then, the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the assumption that the RAM has abnormality regardless of whether the RAM has abnormality.

  Next, it is judged whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step X16). If the value is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM is performed. It is determined whether the value of the area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and power-off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), there is no abnormality in the RAM, so the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

  If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), or if the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step is performed. Based on the state read in X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). When at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), there is an abnormality in the RAM, so a command for main abnormality error notification for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is produced on the production control board (production control). Device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is a probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, when the power supply of the game machine is cut off and restarted during the change of the probability setting value, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, the performance display device 153 provides a display as shown in FIG. After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of signals other than the security signal are output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the probability setting value change mode is entered. After that, the command of which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, on the basis of receiving the command of changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b. Is output to give a notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the probability setting value is cleared (step X28). As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

  Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). ; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the on state (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N), that is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step X41 and the power failure occurs. Perform the processing when it is restored normally.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step X43; Y), the process shifts to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Form a means of conversion.

  If the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is entered. Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). In the production control device 300, on the basis of receiving the command for confirming the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a, 19b. A notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed is given by outputting a voice.

  Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, the value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123) of the timer interrupt process in the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability setting value changing mode or the probability setting value confirming mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing processing (step X120) of the timer interrupt processing. That is, even when the probability setting value changing mode or the probability setting value confirming mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after the transition to the probability setting value changing mode or the probability set value confirming mode. It The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, interruption is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the state (current state) read by the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is not determined based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on). Judgment based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is confirmed.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X34). If no power failure has occurred (step X34; N), the procedure proceeds to step X33. Returning to this, if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred with the probability setting changing flag set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 10 and 11) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process of inhibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec) between the process of permitting the interrupt (step X32) and the process of inhibiting the interrupt (steps X38, X55). . In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change / confirmation processing (step X123), which is processing related to the probability setting value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or a power failure occurs).
Next, the notification end command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the production control device 300, the notification in progress (the notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or the notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is ended based on the reception of the notification end command. .

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting confirming flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) that performs a process of saving the initial value at the time of power recovery in an area to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring). The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.
After that, the command for power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game process number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, etc. Send a command. As a command for screen designation, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variable display game is neither being executed nor in the special game state, it is waiting for a customer. Send the command on the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command on the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a high-probability-number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM areas other than the probability setting value are cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1 byte area of the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for displaying performance (displaying the base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X44. Incidentally, in step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

  Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The areas to be initialized here are the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect count information command, a RAM initialization command (customer wait While displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, a support number information command that is information about the number of times the special figure variation display game with normal electric power support is executed, and the like are also transmitted.

  Next, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

  After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the winning symbol of the special drawing). (Big hit symbol random number, Small hit symbol random number), Random number that determines the hit of the general figure (hit random number), Random number that determines whether or not to win the falling lottery (falling lottery random number)) RWM as the initial value (start value) After saving the data in the predetermined area (step X48), the interrupt is permitted (step X49). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generating circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number and the falling lottery random number are processed by the program It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of timer interrupt processing. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Note that each of the random numbers has a numerical value within a continuous predetermined range, and the updating method may be a counter-type updating with +1 or -1, or all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. It may be a random update. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.
In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the universal symbol, there is only one kind of hit symbol of the universal symbol, but a hit symbol random number is provided by providing a hit symbol random symbol. May be selected from a plurality of types.

  After the initial value random number updating process of step X50, a process of inhibiting interruption (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting interruption (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), an initial value random number updating process Return to (Step X50). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing, the performance display editing processing, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number updating process (step X50), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step X50 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to prevent the random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. The advantage is that

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily interrupting (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X60), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), Wait until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and the secondary control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), And the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.
In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to permit access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed.

Then, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change / confirmation processing (step X123) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends.
On the other hand, when neither the probability setting changing flag nor the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104; N), the solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) are output based on the output data set in various processes. , The lever solenoid 38f, the universal solenoid 37c) and the like are output-processed (step X105) for controlling the drive of the actuator. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main process, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmitting process (step X106) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 by various processes, a random number updating process 1 (step X107), and a random number updating process 2 (step X108) are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switches 38a and 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass A winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X109) is performed to open the frame and monitor for errors such as illegal wins in the regular variable prize device 37 and the special variable prize devices 38, 39.

  Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the first special variation winning device 38, the number of game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls (the number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a) flowing into the first special variation winning device 38. If abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding.

  On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the starting opening switch monitoring processing (step X111) for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37. Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing the special figure 1 variable display game processing, the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game processing, and the general figure variable display game processing. A segment LED which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and which displays the special figure variation display game and various information relating to the game is driven so as to display desired contents by performing the universal figure game process (step X114). Edit processing (step X115) is performed.

  Next, a magnet irregularity monitoring process (step X116) of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a process of checking the detection signal from the board radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality. Illegal vibration monitoring process (step X117), which checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is an abnormality. Illegal vibration monitoring process (step X118), which determines whether an abnormal discharge has occurred. The abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119) is performed. Further, an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (step X120), a game machine status command transmitting process of setting a command relating to an error occurred in the game machine (step X121), and a performance display. The performance display monitor control process (step X122) regarding the control of the device 153 is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended.

  Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by interrupt return. At this time (when the timer interrupt process ends), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 13 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123) in the above timer interrupt process. In the probability setting change / confirmation processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (the range of 0 to 5 in the present embodiment) (step X131).
If the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM (current probability setting value) The value display data is set (step X132), and the probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (f).
On the other hand, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (step X133), and the probability setting value display is performed. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the performance display device 153 includes four 7-segment display devices (7-segment type display devices) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the rightmost 7-segment display of these four 7-segment display units shows the current probability setting value, and the remaining 7-segment display units display “SET”. “” Is indicated.
Specifically, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “0”, the current probability setting value is “setting 1”, and as shown in FIG. When “1” is displayed on the segment indicator and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “1”, the current probability setting value is “setting 2”, and therefore, in FIG. As shown, "7" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", the current probability setting value is "setting 3", As shown in FIG. 14 (c), "3" is displayed on the 7-segment indicator at the right end, and when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "3", the current probability setting value is "set." Since it is 4 "," 4 "is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 14D, and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is" 4 ". If it is, the current probability setting value is “setting 5”, so “7” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 14E, and the area for probability setting value in the RWM is displayed. If the value of is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so that "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 14 (f). When the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 14 (g).
For example, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “0”, the probability setting value display data is “1” in the first digit, “T” in the second digit, and “T” in the third digit. Probability setting value display data for instructing to display "E" and "S" at the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X135). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Then, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal are output (step X136). In step X136, ON data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is up. Therefore, the security signal is continuously output during the probability setting value changing mode and the probability setting value confirming mode (while the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag are set).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting confirming flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting changing / confirming process being executed is the probability setting changing / checking process in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

  If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). In step X139, when an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the immediately preceding input processing (step X103), it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation processing ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is set to 0. +1 is updated in the range of 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change / confirmation processing is ended. The value updated in step X140 (updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set for three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). However, for example, “setting 1” to “setting 3” may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the area for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only be pressed, it is impossible to distinguish between a transition operation for transitioning to the probability setting value changing mode and a changing operation for changing the probability setting value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch from when the power is turned on. When 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation, even though the operation is the transition operation.

  Specifically, in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is the off state, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is When the state is the ON state, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned is the current input process. It is highly possible that the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read by the processing is off. That is, when the transition operation continues even in the probability setting value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is input in the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, when the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transfer operation, There is a possibility that the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is updated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the processing of step X138 is performed, and the processing of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on. I will. As a result, for updating (changing) the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has been continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode). Since the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation (1) is ignored, it is possible to prevent unintended update.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and a storage unit that stores one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM 111C)) and a mode in which the probability setting value is changed to a probability setting value changing mode in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the game machine is powered on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value changing mode, the probability setting value (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means. ) Change Setting change means (game control device 100), operation of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability set value change mode (shift operation), and operation of the second operation unit for changing the probability set value (Change operation) is the same operation (press operation in the case of the present embodiment), and the setting change means continues from the power-on of the gaming machine even during the probability set value change mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the two operation units.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit that is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value changing mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
FIG. 15 shows the starting opening switch monitoring process (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition processing (step X492) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is information regarding the winning of the starting opening set when the jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition processing (step X493).

When the information regarding the winning of the starting opening based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 is not set (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no starting mouth winning is set.
On the other hand, when the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state). (Step X494). Then, when it is during the special figure low probability & no time saving (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step X494; N), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing (step X496) is performed.

  Based on the reception of the right-handing instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 gives a right-handing instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed stroke by display or voice. When the player is in the special game state or the special game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right hand, and the player does not win unless he or she is left-handed. When a winning is detected, the right-handing instruction is informed.

  Then, a table for setting information on the hold by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step X498) is performed. Next, the start opening 2 (ordinary variation winning device 37) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X499), the hard random number acquisition process (step X500) is performed, and the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning of the ordinary variation winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is the information regarding the winning of the starting mouth set in this case (step X501).

When the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is not set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no starting mouth winning is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting mouth winning is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning a prize device 37 (step X501; Y), whether the electric power (normal variable winning a prize device 37) is operating, that is, the normal It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is operated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (step X502). When the universal electric power is operating (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X504. Transition. On the other hand, when the general electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether the general electric power is illegal (step X503).

  In the determination as to whether or not the regular electric fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of illegally awarded prizes for the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). The normally variable winning device 37 cannot win the game ball in the closed state, and can only win the game ball in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number thereof is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than the predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  When the illegal power generation is occurring (step X503; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more. In addition, when the illegal call is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step X505) is performed. Then, the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

[Special processing for common opening switch]
FIG. 16 shows the special figure starting port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is provided to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output number of the starting port signal, which is the number of times of output, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (step X523).
When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure holding (starting) corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored is started. It is determined whether or not the number of stored), that is, the number of special figure suspension (starting storage) to be updated is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255. However, when the upper limit is stored, the value is not saved because the value is updated to +1 and loops to 0.

  Then, if the number of reserved special figure to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended. On the other hand, when the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (special map 1 reserved number or special map 2 reserved number) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch and the special figure holding number to be monitored is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM. (Step X529).

Then, the jackpot random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, the falling lottery random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532) and saved in the falling lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) (step X534), and when the winning is not to the starting opening 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start opening 2 (step X534; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). .

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538) which is the prefetch process is performed. Next, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step X539), and the effect command setting process (step X540) is performed to perform the special figure starting port switch common process. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36, and stores the predetermined random number as a first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It forms a starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37, and the predetermined random number can be stored as a second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. 2 Makes a starting memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In this special figure reservation information determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is during a big hit (during the first special game state) (step X541), and if it is during a big hit (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination. The process ends. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the winning on the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) is won. Is determined (step X542).

  If the winning is to the starting opening 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 and prefetching is performed. On the other hand, when it is not a winning in the starting opening 1 (step X542; N), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (step X543). Then, when the special map low probability & time saving is not in progress (step X543; Y), the special map pending information determination processing is ended. That is, in the normal game state, long variation is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, which has a very long variation time (about 10 minutes), but in this case, prefetching is not performed. On the other hand, if it is not during the special figure low probability & no time saving (step X543; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544).

  When it is not in the special figure high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when it is during the special figure high probability (step X544; Y), is the value of the falling lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure starting port switch common processing within the range of the judgment value of the falling win? The determination is made (step X545). Next, a look-ahead falling lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), effect command setting processing (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

  Then, a pre-reading big hit judging process (step X549) for judging whether the big hit is a big hit or not is determined by whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value (big hit low probability judgment value). If the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step X551), and prepared at step X530 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the hit big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) It is determined whether or not there is a prize (step X553).

  If it is not a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of a win to the starting opening 2 (step X553; Y), a small hit determination process (step X554) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. I do. If the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X557), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step X555; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step X558), the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557, or set in step X558. The stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

After that, a read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X560), and effect command setting processing (step X561) is performed.
Next, a high-probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and a pre-reading big-hit determination process (step X563) for determining whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit judgment value (big-hit high-probability judgment value). I do. When the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step X565), and the special figure starting mouth switch common processing is performed at step X530. The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number thus prepared is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N), the starting mouth winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting mouth switch common processing is checked, and the starting mouth 2 (normal variation winning device 37). It is determined whether or not there is a prize (step X567).

  If it is not a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step X572), the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X567; Y), a small hit determination process (step X568) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. I do. If the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X571), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not the small hit (step X569; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X572), and it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step X573).

  If it is not within the special figure high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, if the special symbol is in high probability (step X573; Y), in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X559, the stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571, or in step X572. The stop symbol information set by the above is overwritten and saved (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching the variation pattern.

Next, a read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and effect command setting processing (step X576) is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, each time the special figure holding information determination process is executed, the result determined by the big hit low probability determination value and the result determined by the big hit high probability determination value are transmitted to the effect control device 300. To be done.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step X578). I do.
Then, the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. The process ends. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are similar to the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

  By the above processing, the prefetch fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target, and the prefetch stop including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target A look-ahead variation pattern command including the symbol command and variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether it falls (whether the probability state of a big hit transitions from a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state)), whether it is a big hit or a small hit, , The type of variation pattern) (pre-reading result) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and particularly displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the displayed decoration special figure starting memory display.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that can determine the result and the variation mode information of the variable display game before the start of the variable display game, based on the startup memory stored in the startup storage unit. Further, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored in the start storage means as the start memory before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 19 shows the prefetching big hit determination processing (steps X549, X563) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing. In this pre-reading big hit determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step X581), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (step X583). When the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 20 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X112) in the above timer interrupt process. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag which is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second special game state is executed. , Is interrupted during execution of the second special game state.

  If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, the process moves to step Y101 and the subsequent special figure 1 variable display is performed. Performs processing related to the game. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. No, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, the special game state is executed based on whether the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. It is determined whether it is in progress (step Y101). Then, in the case of the big hit / small hit in the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific region switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Processing for monitoring and setting the special winning opening count command to be transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the winning of the special winning opening, and for closing the special winning opening when a predetermined number of winnings are made to the special winning opening Process. In the special figure 1 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. For the special game state that is executed based on whether a big hit or a small hit occurs, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special FIG. 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball in the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variation winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is identified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (stochastic operation area). The process of setting the area passing flag is performed. The process for generating the special game state is performed based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

  Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for this purpose is set in the register (step Y106). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y107), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y108).

If the special figure 1 game process number is "0" at step Y108, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game Fig. 1 Performs special process 1 usual process (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing the changing process.
When the special figure 1 game process number is "1" in step Y108, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process, etc. 1 The changing process (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, setting of a fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game process number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. are performed. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and the special figure 1 The special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is performed.
If the special figure 1 game process number is "6" in step Y108, the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) that sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) I do.

  After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is prepared (step Y116), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y117) concerning the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid The lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is ended. This special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
21 and 22 show the special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big figure of the special figure 1 is in the midst of a special game state, that is, the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit. Y131). Then, when the big hit of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y134. If the big hit in special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific region switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Processing for monitoring and setting the special winning opening count command to be transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the winning of the special winning opening, and for closing the special winning opening when a predetermined number of winnings are made to the special winning opening Process. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball in the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variation winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is identified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (stochastic operation area). The process of setting the area passing flag is performed. The process for generating the special game state is performed based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

  Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y153. When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. It is determined (step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is a very long time. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variable time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variable time is measured by a plurality of times by using the number of times of repetition, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (for example, 60000 msec).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game process timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is stored in a register. It is set (step Y139). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y140), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game Figure 2 Special figure 2 usual processing (step Y142) which sets the information and the like which is necessary in order to do processing during fluctuation is done.
If the special figure 2 game process number is "1" in step Y141, the special figure that sets the stop display time of special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is specified. 2 The changing process (step Y143) is performed.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is performed.

If the special figure 2 game process number is "3" in step Y141, setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform the fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening A special winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, or the special figure 2 The special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y147) is performed to set the information necessary for the big hit ending process.
When the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step Y141, the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process (step Y108) I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit are performed. A small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) for setting information necessary for the above is performed.
When the special figure 2 game process number is "8" in step Y141, a small hit mid-range process (step Y150) is performed to set an ending command and information necessary to perform the small hit remaining ball process. To do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls winning in the special winning opening during the small hit process, and the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game process number is "10" in step Y141, the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y153), and a symbol fluctuation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid A lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is ended. The special figure 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing is basically the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing with respect to special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal process, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start changing means that it is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 2 changing display game in which the big hit or the small hit occurs until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to determine this here.

If the special figure 1 cannot start changing (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y216), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area. (Step Y217), the special figure 1 normal processing ends. Further, when the special map 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handing instruction notification has not been made (step Y202; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), effect command setting processing (step Y204) is performed, and a left-handing instruction notification flag is set. Yes (step Y205). The left-handing instruction notification flag is set to be cleared when the specific gaming state ends, whereby the left-handing instruction notification is performed when the game state shifts to the normal gaming state.

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206). If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing (step Y208) is performed. . After that, special figure 1 variation start processing (step Y209) for setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and a decorative special figure 1 pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number is prepared (step Y210). ) And effect command setting processing (step Y211). At the time of performing the process (step Y210) of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the special figure 1 reservation number is not decremented based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is held. The reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number subtracted from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

  Next, the change of special figure 1 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variable display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. Special map status 0 indicates that neither the special map 1 variable display game nor the special map 2 variable display game is running, and the special map status 1 indicates that only the special map 1 variable display game is running, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. There is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is the special game state based on the small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, special figure 1 mid-fluctuation processing shift setting processing (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal processing ends.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal process, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 1 changing display game which is a big hit until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to determine this here.

  When the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y238), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area. (Step Y239), special figure 2 usual processing ends. Further, when the special map 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of the special map 2 reserved is 0 (step Y222).

  Then, when the special figure 2 holding number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing (step Y224) is performed. . After that, the special figure 2 variation start processing (step Y225) for setting information about the special figure 2 variable display game and the like is performed, and a decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226. ) And effect command setting processing (step Y227). At the time of performing the process (step Y226) of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the special figure 2 reservation number is not decremented based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the current special figure 2 reservation is held. The reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number subtracted from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

  Next, the change in special figure 2 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y230). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special maps 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special maps 1 are changing (step Y233). If the special map 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234). If it is not started (step Y234; N), the customer waiting demo is started. Performs processing related to status setting. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y232; N), when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233; Y) or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234; Y). Shifts to step Y238.

  In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y235), and the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. Command setting processing (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

  In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without the backup function loses information on the game state, so that an appropriate production cannot be performed. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change of the game state is transmitted. It will be possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the probability state may change due to the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, it becomes possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

  Further, by transmitting the variation start probability information command each time the special figure variation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. Therefore, it is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the production control device 300 to return to the production according to the game state when it is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 25A shows the special figure 1 variation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In the special figure 1 variation start processing, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of variation patterns in the special figure pending information determination processing is set (step Y241). Then, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) to prepare (step Y242), and the special drawing 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y243), a falling lottery process (step Y244) is performed in which the transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state is performed by lottery. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the deviation information or the big hit information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is stopped. A symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) of setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed to refer to various information relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game. The special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of (1) is set, is prepared (step Y248).

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game. The processing (step Y250) is performed, and the time shortening variation number update processing (step Y251) is performed. Next, as the process number, "1" relating to the process during fluctuation of special figure 1 is set (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal related to fluctuation start of special figure 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blink control timer area ( Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y257), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y258), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. To finish.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 25B shows the special figure 2 variation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In the special figure 2 variation start processing, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for distribution of variation patterns in the special figure pending information determination processing is set (step Y261). Then, a random number is loaded from the special figure 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) to prepare (step Y262), and the special drawing 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y263), a falling lottery process (step Y264) is performed to draw a transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the deviation information, the big hit information or the small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and relates to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information). Special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y266) is performed. Then, the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed to refer to various information relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. The special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table which is a table in which the information of (1) is set is prepared (step Y268).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting information of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game. The processing (step Y270) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation start update processing (step Y271) is performed. Next, as the process number, "1" relating to the process during fluctuation of special figure 2 is set (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal related to fluctuation start of special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area ( Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y277), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y278), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. To finish.

  In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing or special figure 2 variation start processing, information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Falling lottery processing]
FIG. 26 shows the falling lottery processing (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing. In the falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the falling lottery process is ended. In addition, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582). Winning the falling lottery means that the falling lottery random number matches the falling lottery determination value. The falling lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the falling lottery random number is equal to or more than the lower limit value of the falling lottery judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the falling lottery judgment value, and the upper limit value of the falling lottery judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, it is judged that the player has won the falling lottery.

If the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the falling lottery has not been won, the falling lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
When the value of the falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, when the falling lottery has not been won, the falling lottery process is ended. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, processing for shifting to a low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, a signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signals are set to ON and the jackpot 4 signals are set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the high probability & the end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the falling lottery process is ended. As a result, the low-probability state and the normal electric power support state are entered, and the normal game state is entered. Information about the end of the high probability state and the end of the universal communication support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 27A shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step Y283).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y284), and when it is a big hit (step Y284; Y), the big hit flag 1 is set. The process ends. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y284; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y281 (step S281). Y287), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is not a big hit (step Y286; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the out-of-range information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 27B shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y295; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.
When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y292 (step Y292). Y298) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value, which is a jackpot. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301), and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. In this case, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 28 shows a big hit determination process (steps Y285 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y313).

  When the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). When the special figure high probability is not in progress (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is determined as the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step Y316).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 29 shows the small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-described big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result indicates that the lottery for the small hit has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y324), and the small hit judgment process is performed. finish.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 30, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process is shown. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), the stop design number which corresponds to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design save area (step Y334). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly changed to.

  After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the special figure 1 round number. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y338), obtain the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and move to step Y340. . These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y344), and the deviation stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, effect command setting processing (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special symbol 1 Stop the symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number is loaded from (for use) (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, and it saves in the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y364). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly changed to.

  After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 2 stop design pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 round number. Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), obtain the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save in the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and move to step Y370. . These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y376). Next, the special figure 2 small hit design table is set (step Y377), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special design 2 stop design save area (step Y378). By this processing, the small hit type is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

  Further, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the special symbol of the falling stop symbol is drawn. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), and the special figure 2 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special figure 2 stopped symbol setting process is ended.

  Here, the relationship between the stop design pattern and the decoration special drawing command (decoration special drawing 1 command, decoration special drawing 2 command) will be described. FIG. 32 (a) shows a decoration special drawing command table that defines the relationship between the stop design pattern and the decoration special drawing command stored in the ROM 111B of the game control apparatus 100. The name of the stop symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern * (* is a number)", and numbers are sequentially assigned from 0. This number is called a stop symbol number, and is a unique number that is a unique number for each stop symbol pattern.

  In FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, in the case of a big hit, the stop symbol number corresponding to the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number or the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number is selected, and in the case of a small hit, the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. A corresponding stop symbol number is selected, and in the case of a deviation, a stop symbol number of the deviation is selected. Special figure 1 big hit design random number, special figure 2 big hit design random number and special figure 2 small hit design random number is the numerical value of consecutive specified range, the stop design number which corresponds to the numerical value which is extracted at random from here is selected It is like this. By making these symbol random numbers into consecutive numbers within a predetermined range, it becomes easy to understand the definition of the update process of the random numbers and the association with the stopped symbols, and the handling becomes easy in the development of the program.

  In the present embodiment, since there is one type of small hit, it is not necessary to use the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number, but when there are multiple types of small hits, the value of the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number The stop symbol number will be selected based on. Further, regarding the deviation, although it is not selected by the pattern random number, it can be said that the selection is made that the deviation result is obtained by the big hit random number. The big hit random number is also a numerical value within a continuous predetermined range, and the result of the special figure variation display game is selected based on the numerical value randomly extracted from this.

  The stop symbol number is a continuous value from 0 to 7, while the value of the command associated with each stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous value. This, the production control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, and has data corresponding to all the information that can be transmitted from the usable game control device 100. This is because

  The plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted include, for example, those of the same model but having different specifications such as a jackpot probability. In this case, selectable effects and jackpot types have some parts in common, but some parts are different, and all data are stored in the effect control device 300, and the game control device 100 corresponds to the one used by itself. Only the information that has been sent will be transmitted. Of course, it is not limited to the game control device 100 having different specifications of the same model, but may be usable in the game control device 100 of another model as long as all the data of the game control device 100 to be used are stored.

  FIG. 32B shows a table defining the relationship between the stop design and the decoration special command stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300. In the production control device 300, a stop symbol is assigned to each of continuous command values from 00H to 0FH. In the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, only the seven stop symbols are used, and the stop symbols shown by hatching are not used. The shaded stop symbol is used in another game control device 100 in which the type of information to be transmitted is different.

  That is, in the group in which the type of information is a stop symbol, the value of the command associated with each of the plurality of information included in one group is within the range (here, 00H to 0FH) defined by the group. It is a value, and the range is set to be the number of types of information included in the group (16 in this case) that can be used by a plurality of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted. Further, although the range of command values and the number of types of information match here, the range of command values may be wider and may include values of commands that are not used. The value of the command that is not used is a preliminary value, and if it is used when the number of stop symbols increases in the process of development, it is not necessary to change the value of the command of other groups, and the efficiency of program development is improved. You can

  In this way, in the effect control device 300, all stop symbols that can be set in the usable game control device 100 are defined, and decorative special figure commands are assigned to these to be continuous values. Thereby, it is possible to use the game control devices 100 without changing the data of the effect control device 300, and the versatility is enhanced. Moreover, if the stop symbol stored in the effect control device 300 is used in the design stage of the game control device 100, it is not necessary to change the data of the effect control device 300, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

  In the game control device 100, only the stop symbols used by itself are defined, and the stop symbol numbers are assigned so that they are consecutive numbers. Then, the stop symbol number, which is the value of the continuous predetermined range, is selected based on the symbol random number or the big hit random number which is the value of the continuous predetermined range. In this way, since the information of consecutive values is used in the processing inside the game control device 100, the control processing can be easily designed. For example, by making the stop symbol numbers consecutive numbers, it is not necessary to consider the missing number in other processing of the game control device 100 that refers to the stop symbol numbers, and the design becomes easy. In addition, when the stop symbols increase or decrease in the design stage, it is necessary to change the stop symbol number, but since there are few types of stop symbols, the work is easy.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, in the effect control device 300, the decoration special figure command is assigned so that the values of the stop symbols in the effect control device 300 are continuous values. Therefore, in the game control device 100, the value of the decoration special drawing command transmitted to the effect control device 300 is converted by the decoration special drawing command table so as to be a value according to the definition in the effect control device 300. . That is, each control device can handle information as a continuous value in its own processing. Then, when the information is transmitted to another control device, the conversion process is performed so that the value has a value according to the definition at the transmission destination. This facilitates the design of the program in each control device.

  FIG. 33 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. Each program list of the game control program executed by the game control device 100 is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) similar to Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and excludes pseudo instructions (instructions to the assembler) and the like. , One-to-one correspondence with machine language instructions (machine codes) stored in the ROM 111b (game control program storage means).

  Instructions (codes) in each program list are written from the left side, for convenience, a "line number", a "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (computation content) of the instruction, an "operand" of the instruction target, and a description facility. It is divided into "comments" attached for. Unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction), the instructions in the program list are basically executed in the order of line numbers (smallest to largest) from the top to the bottom of the program list.

  The codes in the line numbers 1020 and 1030 correspond to the processing in step Y331, determine whether the big hit flag is stored in the big hit flag 1 area, and branch the processing according to the result of the judgment. The code in line number 1060 corresponds to the processing in step Y332, and loads the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number into the A register. After that, the processing etc. which select the stop design number from the special figure 1 big hit design random number are done.

  The codes in line numbers 1230 to 1280 correspond to the processing in steps Y340 and Y341. At line number 1230, the start address D_TZ_COM of the decoration special view command table shown in FIG. 32A is loaded into the HL register, and at line number 1240, the stop symbol pattern (stop symbol number) is loaded into the A register. The command value corresponding to the stop symbol number is stored in the A register by the process of the line number 1250, and the command value of the A register is loaded into the C register in the line number 1260. This command value is a value corresponding to ACTION of the decoration special figure 1 command.

  At line number 1270, the value corresponding to MODE of the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded into the B register, and at line number 1280, the values of the B register and the C register are saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area. At line number 1290, effect command setting processing is performed. By the above processing, the stop symbol number is converted into the decorative special figure 1 command and transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  In the above description, the effect control device 300 can be commonly used in a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, but the effect control device 300 is only used in the single game control device 100. It may be usable. Even in this case, data corresponding to a value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the game control device 100 may be held. In addition, even if the effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, a value (sendable from all available game control devices 100 ( Data corresponding to values other than (command) may be held.

  In this way, when the effect control device 300 holds data corresponding to a value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100, the effect control device uses data that is no longer used in the development process. In 300, there is a case where it is left as it is. In addition, a case where a part or all of the data of the effect control device 300 is used as a common specification and a part of the data required according to the game machine to be used is used is also cited. In this way, by leaving the data corresponding to the value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100 by the effect control device 300, it is possible to save the trouble of deleting or rearranging the data. Development efficiency can be improved.

  Even when the data corresponding to the value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100 is held, the game control device 100 in the effect control device 300 for each stop symbol pattern. While using the value of the associated command, the stop symbol numbers used in its own processing should be consecutive values, for example, the command and the stop symbol number as shown in FIG. 32 are associated. Then, the value of the command is also associated with the data not used by the corresponding game control apparatus 100 (the shaded portion in FIG. 32B), and the value is not used by the game control apparatus 100 as a command. Although it is a value (for example, 05H), it is a value within a range (00H to 0FH) pre-assigned as a command range to the group to which the data belongs.

  From the above, a game that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, creates a state advantageous to the player It is provided with a control means (game control device 100) and a subordinate control means (effect control device 300) which controls based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means preliminarily transmits each of the transmittable information. The information (for example, stop symbol information) is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control means using the associated value (command), and the information is classified into a group determined by the type of information, and is grouped into one group. The value associated with each of the plurality of pieces of information included is a value within the range defined for each group, and only some of the values within the range are used. Therefore, by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for one group, it is not necessary to change the value of other groups even if the number of information increases in the design stage, and the efficiency of development is improved. Can be increased.

  In addition, the value range is set to be equal to or more than the number of types of information included in the group, and only the value corresponding to the information used by itself is used among the values in the range. . Therefore, by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for one group, it is not necessary to change the value of other groups even if the number of information increases in development, and the efficiency of development can be improved. Can be increased.

  Further, the value range is set to be equal to or more than the number of types of information included in the group that can be used by a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, and the value within the range is used by itself. It means that only the value corresponding to the information to be used is used. Therefore, by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for one group, even if the number of information increases in the development of a plurality of game control means with different types of information to be transmitted, other groups There is no need to change the value of and development efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, the sub-control means is configured to perform control using one data corresponding to the value transmitted from the game control means from among a plurality of held data, and the data corresponding to one group As a result, the number of pieces of data stored in the group is larger than the number of values that can be transmitted from the game control means. Therefore, the data of one slave control means can be commonly used. Further, in the development, whether or not the data can be used can be selected within the range of the data, and the development efficiency can be improved.

  Further, the sub-control means can be commonly used by a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, and holds data corresponding to all the values that can be transmitted from the plurality of game control means. Become. Therefore, one slave control means can be used in common, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, the information included in the group and used by itself can be given a unique number that is a consecutive number apart from the value, and the game-related processing can be executed using the unique number. When selecting one information from each information included in, the random number is extracted from the numerical value of the continuous predetermined range, the lottery process for selecting the unique number based on the numeric value is performed, and the selection is made by the lottery process. This means that the processing relating to the game is executed based on the unique number thus obtained, and the value corresponding to the unique number is transmitted to the slave control means. Therefore, by using continuous numerical values and unique numbers in the processing inside the game control means, it is possible to facilitate the handling of the program of the game control means during the development and improve the development efficiency.

  Further, the sub-control means associates a continuous value within the range with the information included in one group, and the game control means converts the unique number into a value associated in the data of the sub-control means. The conversion process is performed, and the value obtained by the conversion process is transmitted to the slave control means. Therefore, by using consecutive values in the processing inside the slave control means, it is possible to facilitate understanding during development of the program of the slave control means and improve the development efficiency. In other words, the game control means and the sub-control means perform processing by using consecutive numerical values in the internal processing, and when transmitting information, convert it into a value according to the definition of the destination. I am trying to send it.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y402), and the special pattern Figure 1 jackpot, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a stop symbol pattern of jackpot (step Y403). When the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

  If it is not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 holding number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and the special figure 1 information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group.
As described above, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 holding number only in the first half variation pattern in the case of a deviation, and the special figure 1 holding number is considered in the case of a big hit. Instead, the fluctuation pattern is determined.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In the special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure low probability & no time saving (in the normal gaming state) is in progress (step Y421). If it is not during the special figure low probability & no time saving (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not it is a time reduction final variation (step Y427). Here, when the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined to be the time-reduction final variation.

  If it is the final variation in time reduction (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. If it is not the final time shortening fluctuation (step Y427; N), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424) and the process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when it is in the midst of the special figure low probability & no time saving (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final fluctuation (step Y427). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variable display game to be started is won, it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation has occurred.
If it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y427; Y), the first-half offset data and the latter-half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
If it is not the high-probability final change (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). If it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; N), the first half offset data for low probability special figure 2 deviation / small hit is set (step Y430), and the latter half offset data for special figure 2 long fluctuation is set. Is set (step Y432), and the process proceeds to step Y425.

  When the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 long fluctuation is set. Yes (step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 2 hold number.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern that is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state and the second half variation that is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern is selected together.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and the addresses of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 are acquired and prepared (step Y452). The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it deviates from the special figure 1, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the discontinued stop symbol pattern (step Y454). )I do. If the special map 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), a distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different for hitting and for deviating. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the hit occurrence rate, and even 1 byte is sufficient, so the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of a hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviating is higher than the rate of occurrence of hitting, and in order to enable more various effects, the deviating type has a size of 2 bytes.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of special figure 1. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first-half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of special figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired (step Y466). By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set. Then, the first half variation number and the second half variation number are added to generate a variation pattern number (step Y467), the variation pattern number is saved in the variation pattern number area (step Y468), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is ended. To do. As a result, the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y471), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472), The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) and prepared (step Y473).

  Next, it deviates from the special figure 2, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the deviant stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and if the special figure 2 is deviant (step Y474; Y), a 2-byte allocation process (step Y475). )I do. If the special map 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), a distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of special figure 2. To prepare (step Y478). Then, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first-half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y483), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of FIG. Prepare (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired (step Y486). The first half variation pattern is set by this processing. Then, the first half variation number and the second half variation number are added to generate a variation pattern number (step Y487), the variation pattern number is saved in the variation pattern number area (step Y488), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process ends. To do. As a result, the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250 and Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the fluctuation pattern number correction table is set (step Y552), the subtraction value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired (step Y553), and the subtraction value is subtracted from the fluctuation pattern number to correct (step Y554). After that, the fluctuation time value table is set (step Y555), the fluctuation time value corresponding to the corrected fluctuation pattern number is acquired (step Y556), and the fluctuation time value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area. (Step Y557).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state, long fluctuation is set for which the fluctuation time is very long. In this case, as the additional value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 msec) excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here, 60,000 msec), is the additional value. Is calculated as

  Then, it is determined whether the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y558). If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. When the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the special display 2 variation display game is in the normal gaming state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

  Then, when the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is not started (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). Further, when the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

  After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the variation pattern number before correction is prepared (step Y562), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number before correction is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command is set. The process (step Y564) is performed. Next, the target number of reservations is updated by -1 (step Y566), the content of the target random number storage area is shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and fluctuation start information setting is performed. The process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 in order to change the time that is insufficient with the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the timer of 60000 msec and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as the addition result, the timer is subtracted in the timer interrupt process, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 and the game processing timer is set to 60000 m. Set the seconds. As a result, the variation time of the long variation in Special Figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60000 msec × 10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, 2 bytes can be set up to about 262 sec, but for ease of understanding, it is represented by multiplication of 60 sec.

  Here, details of the process of acquiring the variation time value from the selected special figure variation pattern will be described. FIG. 39 shows a fluctuation time value table defining the relationship between the special figure fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time value. The name of the special figure variation pattern is “special figure variation pattern * (* is a number)”, and numbers are sequentially assigned from 1. This number is called a fluctuation pattern number, and is a unique number that is a unique number for each special figure fluctuation pattern. 36 and 37, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the value obtained by adding the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number selected by the fluctuation pattern random number is selected. .

  In the present embodiment, some of the numbers are missing, such as special figure variation patterns 30 to 33. In FIG. 39, a blank is provided so that the missing number portion can be easily understood, but in actual data, there is no blank and the blank is stored. At the beginning of development, there are no missing numbers and there are special figure fluctuation patterns, and each special figure fluctuation pattern is given a fluctuation pattern number in order from 1, but due to the fact that special figure fluctuation patterns were deleted during the subsequent development process. The missing number has occurred. Since there are such missing numbers, the game machine of this embodiment has up to 70 special figure fluctuation patterns, but the number of special figure fluctuation patterns is 70. By deleting and packing unused data in this manner, the area of the ROM 111B can be efficiently used without waste.

  As described above, in selecting the special figure variation pattern, the variation pattern number is calculated from the first half variation number and the second half variation number. Therefore, if the variation pattern number is changed along with the deletion of the special figure variation pattern, the first half variation number and the second half variation number also need to be changed, and the correction work becomes complicated. In particular, the special figure variation pattern is larger in number than the stop symbol pattern, and the correction work is complicated. For this reason, the change pattern number is not changed and is set as a missing number to improve the efficiency of development.

  When acquiring the fluctuation time value from the fluctuation pattern number, the fluctuation time value is acquired by referring to the selected fluctuation pattern number in the fluctuation time value table shown in FIG. However, in the data stored in the ROM 111B of the game control device 100, the missing numbers are filled in so as not to provide a blank line. Therefore, the special figure variation pattern number corresponding to the special figure variation pattern, There is a discrepancy between the ranks counted from the beginning of the fluctuation time value table of the special figure fluctuation pattern. For example, in the information of the special figure variation pattern 34, since the special figure variation patterns 30 to 33 are missing numbers, the order is 30th from the beginning of the variation time value table. There is a gap between and. Therefore, when the fluctuation time value is acquired, the fluctuation pattern number is corrected to be a correction number, and the fluctuation time value is acquired by referring to the correction number in the fluctuation time value table.

  FIG. 40 shows a fluctuation pattern number correction table for correcting the fluctuation pattern number. Since the number of missing numbers in the previous numbers differs depending on the variation pattern number to be corrected, the subtraction value is defined according to the variation pattern number to be corrected. The correction number can be calculated by subtracting the subtraction value from the fluctuation pattern number to be corrected, and this correction number becomes the rank from the beginning of the fluctuation time value table. For example, when the fluctuation pattern numbers are 34 to 51, the order from the beginning of the fluctuation time value table is obtained by subtracting 4 which is the number of the special figure fluctuation patterns 30 to 33 which are missing.

  In this way, for the special figure variation pattern, the correspondence to the missing number is performed by the correction processing by calculation, and for the stop symbol pattern, the correspondence to the missing number is performed by replacing the table. Since there are few stop symbol patterns, there is no problem in replacing them with a table. However, since there are many special figure fluctuation patterns, if a table that defines the correspondence between fluctuation pattern numbers and correction numbers is defined for all fluctuation pattern numbers, a table with a large amount of data is required. Therefore, the special figure variation pattern is dealt with by correction processing by calculation so as to prevent an increase in the amount of data and efficiently use the area of the ROM 111B.

  FIG. 41 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the fluctuation start information setting process executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. The codes in line numbers 2020 to 2040 correspond to the processing in step Y551. The code in line number 2090 corresponds to the processing in step Y552, and the leading address D_HEN_NUM_REV of the fluctuation pattern number correction table is loaded into the HL register. The codes in line numbers 2100 to 2200 correspond to the processing in step Y553, and in line number 2100, the numerical value corresponding to the label R_HEN_NUM + 00H is loaded into the A register. The label R_HEN_NUM + 00H indicates the address of the RAM 111C that stores the variation pattern number selected based on the random number. After that, the variation pattern number loaded in the A register is sequentially referred to the comparison value of the variation pattern number correction table, and when it is determined that the comparison value is less than the comparison value in the row number 2150, the corresponding address is subtracted in the row number 2200. Load the value into the E register.

  The code in line number 2210 corresponds to the processing in step Y554, and the subtraction value loaded in the E register is subtracted from the variation pattern number loaded in the A register. The code in line number 2220 corresponds to the processing in step Y555, and loads the start address D_HEN_TIM of the variable time value table into the HL register. The code in the row number 2230 corresponds to the processing in step Y556, calls the 2-byte data acquisition processing corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD, and acquires the fluctuation time value corresponding to the corrected fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation time value table. The acquired time value is stored in the HL register. The code in line number 2240 corresponds to the processing in step Y557 and loads the variable time value stored in the HL register into the address stored in the IY register. The IY register here stores the address of the special figure game processing timer area.

  The correction number obtained by the correction processing may be stored in the RAM 111C so that it can be used in other processing. Further, even when the correction process is performed, the variation pattern number before the correction is stored in the RAM 111C. This fluctuation pattern number may be used in other processing such as being used for transmitting information to the effect control device 300 as described below. Further, by storing the variation pattern number in the RAM 111C, it is possible to maintain the variation pattern number even after the variation time ends, and it is also possible to maintain it until the setting of the variation pattern number in the next special figure variation display game. This makes it possible to select the stop time by the variation pattern number and the effect of the next special figure variation display game according to the variation pattern number of the previous special figure variation display game. Can be improved.

  Information on the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by transmitting the variation command set in steps Y562 and 563 of FIG. At this time, the information of the variation pattern number before correction is transmitted instead of the correction number. Specifically, the value of ACTION of the variation command is used as the variation pattern number. Therefore, there will be a missing number in the value transmitted to the performance control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 performs the control process without correcting the fluctuation pattern number acquired from the received fluctuation command. On the data stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, the special figure variation pattern information, which is a missing number in the game control device 100, is also stored without being deleted. Therefore, the variation pattern number and the rank from the beginning in the table storing the data corresponding to each special figure variation pattern match. Since the PROM 321 of the production control device 300 has a sufficient capacity, no problem occurs even if data corresponding to the missing special figure variation pattern is left, and the control load is reduced by not performing the correction process. Can be reduced.

  The effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, and has data corresponding to all the information that can be transmitted from the usable game control device 100. is doing. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation pattern which is a missing number in the game control apparatus 100 of the present embodiment is a special figure fluctuation pattern which is no longer used in the process of development, and is also used in another game control apparatus 100. It may be a special figure variation pattern. In any case, the game control device 100 uses the unique number (variation pattern number) attached to the data held by the effect control device 300, and treats the unique number not used by the game control device 100 itself as a missing number. Then, in the process in the game control device 100, a correction number, which is a serial number without a missing number, is calculated and used by the correction process.

  It should be noted that in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, there is data corresponding to the missing special figure variation pattern, but the special figure variation pattern that is not used by any of the game control apparatuses 100 is deleted and blank data. Also good. That is, the variation pattern number and the rank from the beginning (added value of the address) in the table storing the data corresponding to each special figure variation pattern may be in a coincident or proportional relationship.

  From the above, a game that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, creates a state advantageous to the player It is provided with a control means (game control device 100) and a subordinate control means (effect control device 300) which controls based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means preliminarily transmits each of the transmittable information. The associated value (command) is used to transmit information (for example, special figure variation pattern information) to the sub-control unit, and the information is classified into a group defined by the type of information, The value associated with each of the plurality of information included in the group is a value within the range defined for each group, and only a part of the values within the range is used. Na . Therefore, by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for one group, it is not necessary to change the value of other groups even if the number of information increases in the design stage, and the efficiency of development is improved. Can be increased.

  In addition, the group includes a variable system group that includes information about the execution mode of the game (special figure variation pattern), and a symbol group that includes information about the result mode of the game (stop symbol information). , The game control means, each time the game is started, selects one piece of information from the information contained in the variable group and transmits it to the subordinate control means, and selects one piece of information from the information contained in the symbol group. This means that it is transmitted to the slave control means. The contents of these groups are often changed in the development of gaming machines, and at least by assigning a range of values larger than the number of information used for the groups in each of these groups, Even if the number of information increases in the design stage, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

  In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game control means that comprehensively controls the game is provided in the gaming machine. The information used by the game control means in the processing related to the game is classified into a group defined by the type of information, and each information included in the group is given a unique number that is a different number in the information, and one group The unique number of each piece of information included in is a discontinuous number, and the game control means corrects the unique number to be a correction number that is a consecutive number in all the information included in the group. Can be executed, and processing related to the game can be performed using the correction number. Therefore, by using consecutive correction numbers in the processing inside the game control means, the handling of the program of the game control means at the time of development can be facilitated and the development efficiency can be improved.

  Further, the game control means is provided with sub-control means for performing control based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means transmits the information to the sub-control means by using a value previously associated with each piece of information. It is configured and the value is assigned corresponding to the unique number. When the number of information items increases or decreases at the design stage, the correction number changes but the unique number does not change. Therefore, by associating a value with a unique number, it is not necessary to change the value association due to an increase or decrease in the number of pieces of information, and it is not necessary to change the data of the secondary control means, which improves the efficiency of development. You can

  By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100, based on the first start-up memory stored in the first start-up storage means, the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game), Forms a first determining means that can be determined before the start of the. In addition, the game control device 100, based on the second starting memory stored in the second starting storage means, the result and the variation mode information of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), based on the second variation display game. Constitutes a second determining means that can be determined before the start of the. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

  From the above, the starting winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball shot to one side of the game area 32 can be won, and the normal variation winning device 37 is a game ball shot to the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information about the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the means is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. Become.

  Then, these pieces of information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game are later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process.
Further, the game control device 100 constitutes second variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determining means, and the result and variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determining means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has passed the variation time, It constitutes a measuring means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, a long variation is set for which the variation time is very long, but in this case, information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the long variation is set. It is also possible to send a command indicating only that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variable display based on the reception of the command of the long fluctuation. The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when the variation time ends, and the production control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the control load on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[Time reduction change count update process]
FIG. 42 shows the time-reduced fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time shortening variation count updating process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (during high probability state) (step Y571). If the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y571; Y), the time is changed. The shortened variation count updating process ends. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure is being shortened (step Y572). If the special figure is not in the time saving state (step Y572; N), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. In addition, when the special drawing time saving is in progress (step Y572; Y), the number of time shortening fluctuations is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y574). .

If the number of time shortening fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time shortening fluctuation number updating process is terminated. When the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0” (step Y574; Y), a signal related to the end of time saving (for example, the big jack 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , A signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening status signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal is OFF, the normal electric auditors 1 opening extension The state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and the general figure game mode flag area Then, the normal time saving flag is saved (step Y579), and the time shortening variation count updating process ends.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, a command is loaded from the command area for decorative special drawing 1 to prepare (step Y622), and effect command setting processing (step Y623) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where the game machine is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. . Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 msec in the case of out-of-range and 2000 msec in the case of big hit.

  After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If the special map 1 is out of alignment (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, and the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result. It should be noted that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

  When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 2 (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 set as the display time of the special figure 2 is changed. Display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are finished at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the stop display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 deviation design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and effect command setting processing (step Y635) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), effect command setting processing (step Y638) is performed, and special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y638) is performed.

  Then, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area. (Step Y640), information is loaded from the special prize 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed, and the special figure 1 The displayed process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, commands are loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area to prepare (step Y652), and effect command setting processing (step Y653) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 msec in the case of out-of-range, 600 msec in the case of big hit, and 136 msec in the case of small hit.

  After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If the special figure 2 is out of alignment (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If the special figure 2 is not shifted (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. When the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 big hit is not (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decoration special figure 1 is interrupted. A command is prepared (step Y671), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

  That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. It is to be noted that the variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game has already finished, but the display time (stop time) has not finished, it is also subject to interruption. The suspended special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the result of a big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. It should be noted that the special display 1 variable display game is also subject to forced stop even when the variable display has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended.

  In the case where the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 is not being displayed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 set as the display time is displayed. The display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the stop display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 deviation design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and effect command setting processing (step Y666) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing (step Y668) is performed, and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) is performed.

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. The determination is made (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not the special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step Y675), information is loaded from the special winning opening 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed, and the special figure 2 The displayed process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 displaying process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y751) to clear the big hit flag 1 area. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753). If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 1 signal is ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area and prepared (step Y755), and effect command setting processing (step Y756) is performed. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

  After that, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762), and the game number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (step Y764) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when Toku-zu 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is the outlier information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765), and it is not a high-probability final fluctuation ( In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not it is the time reduction final variation (step Y766). Here, when the falling lottery for the running special figure 1 variation display game is won, it is determined that the high probability final variation. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is the special figure variable display game which is the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

  Then, when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765; N) and when it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y765; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and a production command A setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the leftward instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and whether the small hit of special figure 2 is in progress, that is, It is determined whether or not the special game state is being executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

  When the small hit in special figure 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed play is displayed. After that, the change of special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), and the special figure 1 normal process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). The displayed process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
46 and 47 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the special figure 2 game process described above. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 displaying process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815). If the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) for the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area to prepare (step Y817), and effect command setting processing (step Y818) is performed. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

  After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y822), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y824), and the game number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y825). Further, fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (step Y826) is performed, and the processing for displaying special figure 2 is terminated.

  On the other hand, if Toku-zu 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is off information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). . Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N), it is time. It is determined whether it is a shortened final variation (step Y829). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the high probability final variation. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is the special figure variable display game which is the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the final time reduction variation.

Then, when it is not the high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) and when it is not the time shortening final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or if it is a time shortening final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and a production command A setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the player is not aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y834), and effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal relating to a right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned on. Then, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given.
After that, the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y840), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y841), and special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing The shift setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended.

  When the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether or not it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the high probability final variation. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is the special figure variable display game which is the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the final time reduction variation.

  Then, when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N) and when it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y843; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and a production command A setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y847), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 56 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. After that, the change in special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), and the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851). The displayed process is terminated.

  That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device is generated based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. Second special game generating means for forming a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device, based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Processing during fanfare / interval]
48 and 49 show the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112 and Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing is ended. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

  If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, if it is the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variable display game. There is.

  If the game ball has not passed through the universal starting gate 34 (step Y943; N), the processing during fanfare / interval ends. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed the universal figure starting gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. A value (10 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

  Next, the upper special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared (step Y947), and the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the upper special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). Thereafter, the ON output data of the accessory continuously operating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

  Next, a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit medium processing control pointer area (step Y954). The mouth opening information and the special winning mouth opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is set to 0 when opening and closing is repeated in one round. In the present embodiment, long open with V corresponds. In addition, when performing the opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (2 in the case of the present embodiment) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Next, it is determined whether it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

  After that, 4 is set as the process number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save to (step Y962). On the other hand, when it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, when it is the big hit of special figure 2, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y963), and the special winning opening is opened. The time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

  Then, the signal related to the opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening and closing member of the first special variation winning device 38, the upper special winning opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in, for example, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, in the special game state based on the big hit (first special game state), only the upper big winning opening (first special variation device 38) is opened, and the small In the special game state (second special game state) based on the hit, only the lower special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing manner in the first special game state may be such that the upper special winning opening is opened in the first round and the lower special winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 big hit ending process (step Y115) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). When the time reduction determination data is no time saving in step Y1101, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and when the time reduction determination data is time saving in step Y1101, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area), and when the specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. . When there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1106), and a game ball to a specific area (probability change operation area) in a special game state based on a normal big hit (10R normal big hit in the case of the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not the flow is through a specific area irregularity, which is an inflow of (step Y1107).

  If it does not pass through the specific area irregularity (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; Y), irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108), and effect command setting processing (step Y1109) is performed. The probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of step Y1109. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including performance mode information in one of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular variation operating area irregular passing, irregular probability variation information is added.

  Next, "0" relating to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1110), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

The special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2 by performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 variable display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start first. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the game control device 100, after the end of the special game state, the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby unit is provided to prevent the processing relating to the start of the two-variable display game from being brought into an executable state.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y148) in the special figure 2 game process described above. The special figure 2 big hit ending processing is the same processing except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed. In the special figure 2 big hit ending process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data is no time saving in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data is time saving in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1133) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability change operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (10R normal big hit in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not it is the inflow of the specific area irregularly (step Y1137).

  If it does not pass the specific area irregularity (step Y1137; N), the process proceeds to step Y1139. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; Y), irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. The probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of step Y1139. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including performance mode information in one of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular variation operating area irregular passing, irregular probability variation information is added.

  Next, "0" relating to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1140), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1146), the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 52A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102 and 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start without time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to OFF. At this point, the data is only set and not output.

Next, the signal related to the start without time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and normal electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1153), and the universal figure without time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, the special figure low probability and no time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time shortening variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

  Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 56 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. Thereafter, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. By this processing, a normal game state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 52B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103 and 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the two big hit signals are set to ON. Incidentally, the big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with the time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and normal electric accessory 1 Set the open / extended state signal to ON.
After that, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1163), and the universal figure time reduction flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, the special figure low probability and time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial value is set in the time shortening variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state. The value is saved (step Y1166). In the case of the present embodiment, since the support count is 100, 100 is saved as the initial value in step Y1166.

  Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By this process, the special game low probability second specific game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hit mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hit mode is set from during the big hit, the big hit end setting process 2 does not perform the right hit setting.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 53 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal relating to the start of special time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, the two big hit signals are set to ON. Incidentally, the big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Next, the signal related to the start with high probability and shortened time is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and the special figure high probability and time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal relating to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 ends. By this processing, a high probability state is achieved. That is, by executing the big hit end setting process 1 and then the big hit end setting process 3, it becomes the first specific game state, and by executing the big hit end setting process 2 and then the big hit end setting process 3, the special figure high probability is increased. It becomes the second specific game state.
Through the above processing, it is possible to set the specific game state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special game state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific gaming state (first specific gaming state ST2, second special gaming state ST3 with high special figure probability) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game will be a special result is higher than in the normal state. It constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
FIG. 54 shows the small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this small hitting fanfare middle processing, first, a small hit opening opening command for opening the lower special winning opening is prepared (step Y1201), and effect command setting processing (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 is set as the processing number for the processing during the small hit (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).

  Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric auditors 2 working signal is ON) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step Y1206). Then, the lower big prize hole on-data is saved in the big prize hole solenoid output data area (step Y1207), and the big prize hole count number area for counting the number of prizes to the big prize hole is cleared (step Y1208). The processing during the hit fanfare ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 small hitting end processing (step Y152) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 which is related to the special process of the special figure 2 is set as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y1334), the off number is saved in the round LED pointer region (step Y1335), and the special figure status region is cleared ( Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special map low probability & no time saving (in the normal gaming state) is being performed (step Y1337). If the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. To do. If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340).

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (step Y1340; Y), a decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and effect command setting processing (step Y1342) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. As a result, when the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 is controlled by one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) by the variable display game execution control means. In the case where the execution control of the variable display game is performed, when the other variable display game whose execution control is performed by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, The resuming control means is capable of executing resuming control for resuming one of the suspended variable display games after the special game state based on the other variable display game is finished.

[Game machine status command transmission process]
FIG. 56 shows the gaming machine state command transmission processing (step X121) in the above timer interruption processing. In this gaming machine status command transmission processing, first, if the gaming machine status command transmission timer that manages the interval for periodically transmitting gaming machine status commands is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X601), and the gaming machine status command is transmitted. It is determined whether the timer has timed out (step X602).

  When the gaming machine state command transmission timer has not timed out (step X602; N), the gaming machine state command transmission process ends. When the gaming machine status command transmission timer has timed out (step X602; Y), the timer initial value is saved in the gaming machine status command transmission timer area (step X603). Here, 16 ms is set as the initial value. This time is the same as the error monitoring cycle in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X109) which is one of the processes for monitoring the error. Of course, other time values may be used.

  Next, clear data is set as the gaming machine status command 1 (ACTION) (step X604), and the values indicating the presence or absence of each error are combined (steps X605 to X611) to generate the gaming machine status command 1 (ACTION). (See FIG. 57A). The status flag of each error is set in the process of monitoring the corresponding error. Then, the gaming machine state command 1 (MODE) is prepared (step X612), and effect command setting processing for setting transmission of the gaming machine state command 1 is performed (step X613).

  Next, clear data is set as the gaming machine status command 2 (ACTION) (step X614), and the values indicating the presence or absence of each error are combined (steps X615 to X621) to generate the gaming machine status command 2 (ACTION). (See FIG. 57 (b)). The status flag of each error is set in the process of monitoring the corresponding error. Then, the gaming machine state command 2 (MODE) is prepared (step X622), the effect command setting process for setting the transmission of the gaming machine state command 2 is performed (step X623), and the gaming machine state command transmission process is ended.

  FIG. 57 shows the structure of the gaming machine status command. Information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in each bit. Also, the most significant bit is always 0 to distinguish it from MODE of the command. Information regarding the presence or absence of an abnormality in the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2. The gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 are transmitted periodically (here, every 16 ms).

  As will be described later, in the effect control device 300, when a new command is received while the command storage area is full, the oldest command is overwritten, but the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 are periodically executed. By transmitting the status, the status of the gaming machine can be sent by the new gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 even if the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are discarded by overwriting, and the notification of the abnormality is surely performed. It can be carried out.

  The gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted periodically only when an abnormality has occurred. Further, in the case where an abnormality has occurred, it is possible to periodically send only the command for notifying the abnormality that has occurred among the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2, or both the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 Both may be transmitted periodically. Further, in this case, when the abnormality is resolved, the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 indicating that there is no abnormality may be periodically transmitted over a certain period. Also in this case, it is possible to periodically transmit only the command notifying the abnormality that has occurred among the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2, or both the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 You may make it transmit regularly over a fixed period.

  Further, depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred, the type of abnormality that has occurred, the gaming state, etc., it is possible to select whether or not to periodically transmit one or both of the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2. good. Further, the transmission cycle of the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 may be selectable according to the presence / absence of an abnormality, the type of abnormality that has occurred, the game state, and the like.

Here, an example of the data structure of the ROM 111B is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 58A, the ROM 111B provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 has a program / data area in which programs and fixed data are stored, and arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program. A ROM comment area that can be set, a vector table area that stores a table that sets the start address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing, and the internal function of the gaming microcomputer 111 is set by hardware. And a HW (hardware) parameter area for storing parameters for performing the operation.

  In the program / data area, as shown in FIG. 58A, a program area 111Ba in which various programs are stored, a first unused area 111Bb, and a data area 111Bc in which various fixed data are stored in order from the beginning. And a second unused area 111Bd. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the second unused area 111Bd, an illegal access reset is generated.

  In the data area 111Bc, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), an area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table that stores the upper limit judgment value table used in the big hit judgment and a performance display that stores data related to the performance display. Areas for various data such as an area A3 for data are provided. Further, an unused area A2 in which access is prohibited is provided between the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display in the data area 111Bc. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the unused area A2, an illegal access reset is generated.

CPU111A sets the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the present probability setting value in step X585 of the pre-reading big hit judgment processing (FIG. 19) or step Y315 of the big hit judgment processing (FIG. 28). At that time, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired and set from the ROM 111B using the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM as a pointer.
Further, the CPU 111A sets the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X584 of the prefetch big hit determination process (FIG. 19) or step Y314 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 28). At this time, the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is used as a pointer to obtain and set the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value from the ROM 111B.

  In the pre-reading big hit judging process and big hit judging process, the process of judging whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (the range of 0 to 5 in the present embodiment) is not performed. Therefore, even when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, data is acquired from the ROM 111B by using the value (abnormal value) as a pointer. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, that is, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for the performance display. When the two are adjacent to each other, it is not possible to accurately determine the big hit, which may cause a disadvantage that the big hit is likely to occur or the big hit becomes difficult to occur.

  Specifically, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other as shown in FIG. 59, and when the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is acquired from the ROM 111B. When the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "5" (within the normal range), the value is used as a pointer to determine the upper limit corresponding to "setting 6" in the low probability. The value, that is, the accurate data can be obtained. On the other hand, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “7” (outside the normal range), the value is used as a pointer to store the data stored in the area A3 for performance display, That is, incorrect data will be acquired. The same applies when the upper limit determination value in the high probability is acquired from the ROM 111B.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58B, the unused area A2 is arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table. As a result, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, if the upper limit determination value is acquired from the ROM 111B by using the value as a pointer, the unused area (access prohibited area) A2 is set. Since access will be made, illegal access reset will occur. As a result, it is possible to initialize the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM and notify the abnormality.

  Specifically, when an illegal access reset occurs, the program is restarted and the main process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is started. At that time, since the process (steps X55 to X61) at the time of the power failure occurrence is not executed before the restart, the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is not the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 in the main processing after the restart. Is determined (step X16; N). Further, at that time, since the setting change operation (the operation of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not performed at the time of the restart, in the main processing after the restart, the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are Both are determined to be in the off state (step X21; N). Therefore, since the processing of steps X25 and X26 is executed, the setting change operation is requested, that is, the abnormality is notified. Then, due to this request (notification), the power of the gaming machine is turned on again while executing the setting change operation, so that the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is initialized ( Step X28).

  The area A1 for the upper limit determination value table may be arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc as shown in FIG. 58 (c). In this case, even if the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the upper limit judgment value table area A1, an illegal access reset occurs when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is out of the normal range. To do. That is, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table is arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the value is used as a pointer and the upper limit is read from the ROM 111B. When trying to acquire the determination value, the second unused area (access prohibited area) 111Bd is accessed, so that illegal access reset occurs.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control means for controlling the game (game control device 100 (CPU111A)), and the storage means (game that stores the information necessary for the control of the game by the control means. Controller 100 (ROM 111B)), and each storage area included in the area for the probability value table (area A1 for the upper limit determination value table) among the plurality of storage areas included in the storage means is the storage area. The probability value assigned to the probability set value corresponding to is stored in the probability setting value (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means among the plurality of storage areas. Information (data) is acquired from the corresponding storage area, and the lottery (big hit determination) of the game is performed using the information. The storage means stores the information continuously in the probability value table area. There unused area (unused area A2, the second unused area 111Bd) is configured to be disposed (see FIG. 58 (b), (c)).
With this configuration, when the probability setting value (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage unit is outside the normal range, the unused area (the unused area A2, The second unused area 111Bd) will be accessed. That is, when an accurate lottery result cannot be obtained, the lottery itself is not executed, so that it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is extremely easy to win the lottery, or it is very difficult to win the lottery.

  Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 60, a timer interrupt process not shown, and a command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 61.

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 60, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed in which a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal is set, and an operation of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal of the player is changed (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching at a timing later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18). C18), a board for performing a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor, the solenoid, and the reel 6 of the board production device 44, and controlling the presentation by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process (step C8) of clearing WDT.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 61 shows a command reception interrupt process for storing the command transmitted from the game control device 100 in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 322. The command from the game control device 100 is composed of MODE indicating the type of command and ACTION indicating the contents of the command, and a combination of these forms one command.

  In the command reception interrupt processing, first, the reception monitoring timer is stopped (step C101), and the command is read from the reception buffer of the command I / F 331 that receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the register of the CPU 311 (step S101). C102), it is determined whether the received command is in the MODE range (step C103). If the received command is in the MODE range (step C103; Y), the command is saved as a reception MODE in the reception command area provided in the RAM 322 (step C104). The received command area is an area provided in the RAM 322 and is a dedicated area for temporarily storing the received command. Next, as the MODE reception flag, OK indicating that MODE is received is set (step C105), the reception monitoring timer is set to 0 and started (step C106), and the command reception interrupt processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the received command is not within the MODE range (step C103; N), it is determined whether the MODE reception flag is OK (step C107). If the MODE reception flag is not OK (step C107; N), NG indicating that MODE is not received is set as the MODE reception flag (step C120), and the command reception interrupt process ends. In this case, the command is not normally received, and the command in the received command area is discarded.

  When the MODE reception flag is OK (step C107; Y), it is determined whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step C108). If the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step C108; Y), NG indicating that MODE is not received is set as the MODE reception flag (step C120), and the command reception interrupt process ends. In this case, the command is not normally received, and the command in the received command area is discarded.

  If the reception monitoring timer has not timed out (step C108; N), the command is saved as a reception ACTION in the reception command area (step C109), and NG is set as the MODE reception flag (step C110). Next, the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are loaded from the reception command area and prepared (step C111), and a reception command range check process is performed to check whether the received command is within a valid range as a command (step C112). ).

  In the production control device 300, the validity is checked after the received command is stored in the received command area provided in the RAM 322. Since there are many types of commands transmitted to the production control device 300 and the range of commands is wide, checking the validity is complicated, and after storing the received command from the register in the received command area provided in the RAM 322, the validity is newly confirmed. I check it. For this reason, it is possible to ensure the accuracy although the processing takes time.

  If the range check by the received command range check process is not OK (step C113; N), that is, if the range check is outside the valid range for the command, the command reception interrupt process ends. In this case, the command is not normally received, and the command in the received command area is discarded. If the range check by the received command range check processing is OK (step C113; Y), that is, if the range is valid as a command, it corresponds to the command write index indicating the area for storing the command received this time. The address of the command buffer area to be operated is calculated (step C114), and the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are saved in the calculated command buffer area (step C115). The command buffer area is an area for storing commands in the RAM 322.

  Next, the command write index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C116), and it is determined whether the command reception counter indicating the number of commands stored in the command buffer area is 32 or more (step C117). ). The command buffer area is provided with 32 areas for storing commands, and when the command reception counter is 32 or more, there is no space in the command buffer area.

  If the command reception counter is not 32 or more (step C117; N), the command reception counter is updated by +1 (step C118), and the command reception interrupt process is ended. In this case, there is a vacancy in the command buffer area and the command is stored in the vacant area.

  On the other hand, when the command reception counter is 32 or more (step C117; Y), the command read index indicating the area from which the command is read next is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C119), and the command reception interrupt process is executed. To finish. In this case, there is no space in the command buffer area, and a new command is overwritten in the area where the oldest command is stored. Read the command so that the next oldest command is the next read command. Update the index.

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 62 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the command reception number is completed is completed. It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. Is configured. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to make a vacant space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207) and the received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

  Then, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the processing returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is ended. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 63 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When MODE and ACT are determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step S232) In C234; N), the received command analysis processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable system commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of jackpot system commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; Y), the big hit type command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information relating to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  In addition, when it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot system commands such as the hold number command and error command. (Step C241). The single-shot type command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination like a pattern command and a variable type command. This single-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error / illegal system command, and a model designation command. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single-shot system command (step C241; Y), the single-shot system command process (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

  In addition, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot type commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol type commands (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetching symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetching symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable type command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) for which the special figure variation display game is not executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from the normal mode, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. Then, the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variable system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is a command that gives advance notice of the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the starting memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect, and from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
FIG. 64 shows the look-ahead symbol type command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this read-ahead symbol system command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetching pattern command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. Save in the prefetch symbol command area in FIG. 1 (step C302), set the prefetch variable command reception wait flag (step C304), and finish the prefetch symbol system command processing.

  If the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, if the received prefetching symbol-related command is related to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. Special figure 2 It saves in the pre-reading design command area (step C303), sets the pre-reading variable command reception waiting flag (step C304), ends pre-reading design system command processing. The read-ahead variable command reception wait flag is set in step C304 because the read-ahead symbol command and the read-ahead change command (read-ahead change pattern command) are set (pair).

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
FIG. 65 shows the look-ahead variable system command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this prefetching variable command processing, it is first determined whether or not the prefetching variable command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, if there is a read-ahead variable command reception wait flag set in the above-described read-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If the pre-reading variable command reception is not waiting (step C311; N), the pre-reading variable command processing is ended. On the other hand, if the prefetching variable command is waiting to be received (step C311; Y), the prefetching variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C312).

  After that, in the processing of steps C313 to C316, processing for converting the look-ahead change command (look-ahead change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is performed so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300. First, the process (step C313) of setting the look-ahead variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information is performed, and the special memory type information of the start-up memory corresponding to the read-ahead variable system command received this time and the relevant information A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the current number of reserved special types.

  Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub prefetch change command MODE corresponding to the MODE of the prefetch change command is acquired (step C314). Further, the look-ahead variable ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the in-sub-look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the look-ahead variable command is acquired (step C316).

  Although the MODE includes the information on the first half fluctuation, the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE changes depending on the number of holdings at the time of judgment, so the judgment at the time of preliminary judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start The judgment result may differ depending on the time judgment. Therefore, in order to make it possible to easily and surely perform the process of the prefetching notice effect without being affected by the hold number at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current hold number, and It is designed so that they can be handled commonly regardless of the number of holds. For example, if there is no reach and there is a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, or if there is no reach and there is a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding situation, The look-ahead notice effects are converted into MODEs classified according to the matters to be considered, so that the look-ahead notice effects can be processed easily and reliably.

  Further, the ACT includes information on the latter half variation such as presence / absence of reach and type of reach. The details of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT do not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in the normal reach, for example, the final stop symbol is set to be one stop before the reach symbol, one stop before the last symbol, and a hit case. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system into the same ACTs, the number is reduced, and the processing load such as checking in the processing of the prefetching notice production is reduced.

  Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not 0 (step C317; N), the prefetch variable system command processing is terminated because the command value is abnormal. On the other hand, if both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the command after conversion is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and the pending number (step C318), and the MODE is set. A prefetch command consistency check process (step C319) is performed to determine whether the combination of ACT and ACT (command combination) is normal.

  As a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), if the command combination is not normal (step C320; N), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), prefetch lottery processing (step C321) for randomly selecting the execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

  Then, when the prefetching notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the prefetching variable system command processing is ended. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the occurring prefetching notice effect (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C321)) immediately started? Is determined (step C323). The effect to be started immediately is, for example, a notice of a pending change for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, an effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead notice effect that is performed during execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect that continuously generates a particular effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games, or a variation. The effect is to give an advance notice by the character appearing during the display, and the pending change advance notice to change the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display at a timing later than the current time. As for the timing of starting the execution of the effect which does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game is ended and the execution of the next special figure variation display game is started. The timing to be performed is applicable.

  If the effect does not start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetching variable system command processing ends. In this case, the advance notice is set at the time of starting the special figure variation display game that executes the prefetch advance notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead notice effect is set (step C324), and the look-ahead variable system command processing ends.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 66 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is the information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

  If the special figure type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

  If the variable command and the symbol type are not compatible (step C363; Y), the variable command processing ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlying symbols, 10R jackpot symbols, 4R jackpot symbols, and small hit symbols. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, when the variation command of the deviation (variation pattern command) is received, as in the case where the symbol command of the 10R big hit symbol is received, in performing the effect. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type). Also, if one of the commands has been discarded or is damaged, it will be inconsistent, and in this case also, processing by the variable command and the symbol command will not be performed.

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type that is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, the state of changing the special map indicates that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process ends.

  Here, the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) form combination information that is used by combining a plurality of pieces of information. In the above-mentioned read-ahead variable system command processing, if the information of one of the read-ahead symbol command and the read-ahead variable command forming the combination information is not normal information such as being discarded or damaged, the combination is abnormal. As a result, the prefetch effect executed based on the combination information is not performed (step C320).

  Further, the variable command and the symbol command also form combination information which is used by combining a plurality of information. In the above-mentioned variable command processing, if one of the variable command and the pattern command forming the combination information is not normal information such as discarded or damaged, the combination is regarded as inconsistent. The decorative special figure variation display game executed based on the information is not played (step C363).

  As a case where one of such combination information is discarded or damaged, there is a case where the command buffer area has no free space and is overwritten by a new command. In particular, since the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are transmitted periodically, if the command processing is delayed due to some trouble, the command buffer area becomes full, and there is a risk of discarding due to overwriting. Of course, it is possible that the received command is discarded or damaged due to a problem other than the command buffer area being full. For example, a case where the command cannot be received normally due to a problem in transmission / reception can be considered. Then, by not performing the process corresponding to the case where one of the combination information is discarded or damaged, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the existence of the command that becomes inconsistent.

  In addition, when one of the combination information is discarded or damaged, all the commands included in the combination information may be discarded. Further, when one of the combination information is found to be damaged, all the commands included in the combination information may be discarded. In this way, it is possible to prevent inconveniences due to the existence of inconsistent commands, and also to secure a free space in the command buffer area.

  Further, in the production control device 300, a new command is overwritten while the command buffer area is full, so some commands of the combination information are discarded in the state where some of the combination information exists as the oldest command. To be done. When the new command is discarded when the command buffer area is full like the payout control device 200 described later, since the new command is a part of the combination information, a part of the combination information is The command is discarded. In accordance with such discarding, all the combination information may be discarded. As a result, it becomes possible to secure an empty area in the command buffer area at the time when the command before the command processing is started is received.

  Further, the number of pieces of information forming the combination information may be three or more, and also in this case, if at least one piece of information is discarded or damaged, the processing based on the combination information is not performed.

  From the above, in the gaming machine capable of executing the game on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and paying out the game medium on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined payout condition, the game control means for controlling the game as a whole (the game control device 100). ), And sub-control means (effect control device 300) that performs control based on information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the sub-control means includes a plurality of areas for sequentially storing the received information. The information storage means (RAM 322) having the information storage area (command buffer area) is provided, and when new information is received in a state where there is no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information, the oldest information is stored. It is configured to discard the information of the area and store new information in the area, and the information includes combination information that is used by combining a plurality of information. If some of the information of the information included in the information it is destroyed, and thus that does not perform the process to be executed based on the combination information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the process from progressing in an incomplete state and causing further defects.

  Further, the sub-control unit is a production control unit (production control device 300) that controls production based on production information that is information transmitted from the game control unit, and the game control unit executes the game as combination information. If the variation information (variation command) regarding the aspect and the symbol information (symbol command) regarding the result of the game are transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means discards one of the variation information and the symbol information, This means that the effect related to the game corresponding to the discarded information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience such as the decorative special figure variation display game being executed in an incomplete state and the effect being inconsistent with the result from being performed.

  Further, the sub-control means is an effect control means for controlling the effect based on effect information which is information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means starts the right to execute the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Starting memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as memory, and pre-judging means for judging the execution mode and result of the game based on the starting memory before starting the game based on the starting memory. (Game control device 100), and based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means as the combination information, the pre-reading variation information (pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command)) regarding the execution mode of the game, and the game Pre-reading pattern information (pre-reading pattern command) regarding the result is transmitted to the production control means, and the production control means, pre-reading variation information and pre-reading. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the judgment result by the pre-judgment means based on the pattern information, and when one of the look-ahead variation information and the look-ahead symbol information is discarded, the look-ahead corresponding to the discarded information. It means that no performance is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem such as the prefetch effect being executed in an incomplete state and the effect being inconsistent with the result.

  Further, when discarding some information of the combination information, the secondary control unit may also discard other information of the combination information. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the processing from progressing in an incomplete state and causing further defects.

  Next, the control executed by the payout microcomputer 211 of the payout control device 200 will be described. The payout microcomputer 211 performs a main process shown in FIG. 67 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 68.

[Main processing]
The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, an interrupt inhibiting process (step A1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step A2) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs, and an interrupt process mode. An interrupt mode setting process (step A3) for setting is set.

  Next, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step A4), and all output ports are set to OFF (no output) (step A5). As a result, the firing permission signal 2 output from the payout control device 200 is also turned off (prohibited state). After that, when an interrupt occurs, stack pointer setting processing (step A6) for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like is performed, and the serial port for communication with the game control device 100 is set. Is performed (step A7).

  Then, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step A8), all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared (step A9), and the initial value is saved in the area to be initialized (step A10). ). Next, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal in the pay-out microcomputer (clock generator) is activated (step A11). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the payout microcomputer. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit into a frequency divider circuit and a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU of the dispensing microcomputer based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating the timer interrupt signal.

  After that, the interruption is permitted (step A12), and the firing control determination process for determining whether or not the gaming ball can be fired is performed (step A13). In this firing control determination processing, it is determined whether the card unit is properly connected, and if it is properly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set to ON (permission state), and if it is not properly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set. Set to off (prohibited state).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the ball lending control mode for discharging the game balls is in progress based on the ball lending request from the card unit (step A14). In the ball lending control mode, the ball lending control in progress flag is set, and whether the ball lending control mode is in progress or not is determined by the presence or absence of the ball lending control in progress flag.

  In the case of this ball lending mode (step A14; Y), a ball lending control process (step A15) that performs overall control relating to the ball lending is performed, a payout control process (step A18) is performed, and an error notification edit process (step A18) is performed. Perform A21). By the ball lending control process (step A15) and the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are discharged based on the ball lending request transmitted from the card unit when the player performs the ball lending operation. .

  On the other hand, when it is not in the ball lending control mode (step A14; N), the prize ball control for discharging the game ball based on the payout command (prize ball command) transmitted from the game control device 100 when the prize is won in the prize hole. It is determined whether the mode is in progress (step A16). In the prize ball control mode, the prize ball control flag is set, and whether the prize ball control mode is set or not is determined by the presence or absence of the prize ball control flag.

  When in the prize ball control mode (step A16; Y), the prize ball control process (step A17) for performing integrated control of prize balls is performed, the payout control process (step A18) is performed, and the error notification editing process is performed. (Step A21) is performed. By the prize ball control process (step A17) and the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are discharged based on the payout command transmitted from the game control device 100 when a prize is won in the winning opening.

  In the payout control process (step A18), sequence control necessary for performing common game ball payout operation in paying out prize balls and paying out balls is performed. Note that the ball lending control flag and the prize ball in-control flag are cleared by the completion of the payout of the prize balls or the ball lending in this payout control process, and the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode are completed. There is.

  If the prize ball control mode is not in effect (step A16; N), an overpayment error monitoring process (step A19) for monitoring the occurrence or cancellation of an error in which a game ball has been overpaid is performed. It should be noted that the release of the overpayment error is performed based on the operation of the error release switch provided in the payout control device 200.

  Then, the payout device control start determination processing (step A20) for setting the start of the ball lending control mode or the prize ball control mode is performed, and the error notification editing processing (step A21) is performed. In the error notification editing process (step A21), the status of various errors is determined, the display data of the error status display device provided in the payout control device 200 is edited, the information transmitted to the game control device 100 is edited, and the test shooting test is performed. Performs processing such as signal output data editing. After that, the condition regarding the output of the payout busy signal that indicates to the game control device 100 whether the payout control can be started is determined, and the payout busy signal editing process (step A22) of editing the output data of the payout busy signal is performed. , And returns to step A13.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process in the payout control device 200 will be described. The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 211A. When a timer interruption occurs in the payout microcomputer, the timer interruption processing of FIG. 68 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, first, a register saving process (step A31) for moving the value held in a predetermined register to the RWM is performed. Incidentally, in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the payout microcomputer in the present embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, based on the output data set in various processes, output process (step A32) for performing drive control of the payout motor and the like is performed, and inputs from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, each process. An input process (step A33) of reading the state of the input port is performed.

  Next, a timer updating process (step A34) for updating various timers is performed, and a command receiving process for receiving a command from the game control device 100 is performed (step A35). Then, a ball lending request monitoring process (step A36) for checking the ball lending request and the like from the card unit and setting for enabling the payout of prize balls and ball lending is performed. After that, an input monitoring process for monitoring signals of the input switch system, such as signals from the payout ball detection switch 81, the shoot ball break switch 82, the overflow switch 83, and the frame radio wave sensor 84, and the abnormality detection signal 1 (step A37). I do.

  Then, the payout unit editing process (step A38) for editing the control signal of the payout motor is performed, and the payout prize ball signal to be transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer is edited each time the number of actually paid prize balls reaches a predetermined number. The external information editing process (step A39) is performed. Subsequently, an interrupt end declaration is made (step A40), a process of restoring the register data saved in step A31 is performed (step A41), and then a process of permitting an interrupt (step A42) is performed to perform a timer interrupt process. To finish.

[Command reception processing]
FIG. 69 shows the command reception process (step A35) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a received command in the serial reception buffer register of the serial communication circuit that receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100 (step A51). If there is no received command (step A51; N), the command receiving process ends. If there is a received command (step A51; Y), the received command is read from the reception buffer register to the register of the CPU 211A (step A52).

  Next, it is determined whether the received command read out to the register of the CPU 211A is a normal value (step A53), and if it is not a normal value (step A53; N), the command reception process ends. In this case, the received command is discarded. If the value is normal (step A53; Y), it is determined whether the reception buffer area, which is the storage area provided in the RAM 211B, is full (step A54).

  If the reception buffer area is full (step A54; Y), the command reception process ends. In this case, the received command is discarded. If the reception buffer area is not full (step A54; N), the number of received commands of the command reception counter indicating the number of commands stored in the reception buffer area is updated by +1 (step A55). In the reception buffer area of this embodiment, 16 areas for storing received commands are prepared. When the command reception counter is 16, it is determined that the reception buffer area is full. There is. The number of storage areas provided in the reception buffer area can be set arbitrarily and may be one.

  Then, the address of the reception buffer area corresponding to the command writing index indicating the area for storing the command received this time is calculated (step A56), and the received command is saved in the calculated reception buffer area (step A57). Then, the command writing index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 15 (step A58), and the command receiving process is ended.

  The number of commands transmitted to the payout control device 200 is smaller than the number of commands transmitted to the effect control device 300. Therefore, the number of areas for storing the received command in the payout control device 200 (here, 16) is smaller than the number of areas for storing the received command in the effect control device 300 (here, 32). .

  FIG. 70 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the command reception process executed by the CPU 211A of the payout control device 200. Each program list of the game control program executed by the payout control device 200 is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) similar to Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and excludes pseudo instructions (instructions to the assembler) and the like. , One-to-one correspondence with machine language instructions (machine codes) stored in the ROM 211B (game control program storage means).

  Instructions (codes) in each program list are written from the left side, for convenience, a "line number", a "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (computation content) of the instruction, an "operand" of the instruction target, and a description facility. It is divided into "comments" attached for. Unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction), the instructions in the program list are basically executed in the order of line numbers (smallest to largest) from the top to the bottom of the program list.

  The codes in line numbers 4020 and 4030 correspond to the processing in step A51. In line number 4020, the value of the receive buffer status register (the value corresponding to the label C_RXBST), which is a register indicating the number of bytes of the received data, is loaded into the A register. In line number 4030, if there is no received command, the command reception process ends.

  The codes in line numbers 4060 to 4090 correspond to the processing in steps A52 and A53. Line number 4060 loads the received command (value corresponding to label C_RXBUF) to the W register, and line numbers 4070 to 4080 terminate when the loaded value is a value not defined as a command. That is, the legitimacy is checked on the register of the CPU 211A before the received command is stored in the RAM 211C. Since the number of types of commands transmitted to the payout control device 200 is small and the range of commands is narrow, it is easy to check the correctness, and the speed is increased by performing the check before storing in the reception buffer area. .

  The codes in line numbers 4120 to 4150 correspond to the processing in steps A54 and A55. In line number 4120, the command reception counter (the numerical value corresponding to the label R_COM_CNT + 00H) is loaded into the HL register. If the loaded value is 16 in the line numbers 4130 and 4140, the reception buffer area is full, and the process ends. In line number 4150, the number of received commands is updated by +1 if the receive buffer area is not full.

  The codes in line numbers 4180 to 4200 correspond to the processes of steps A56 and A57. At line number 4180, the start address of the receive buffer area (numerical value corresponding to label R_COM_BUF + 00H) is loaded into the HL register, and at line number 4190, the command write index (numerical value corresponding to label R_WRIT_IDX + 00H) is loaded into the A register. In line number 4200, the command stored in the W register is stored at the address corresponding to the value obtained by adding the value of the A register to the HL register.

  The codes in line numbers 4230 to 4250 correspond to the processing in step A58. In the row numbers 4230 and 4240, the value of the A register is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 15. At line number 4250, the value of the A register is stored in the command write index area (label R_WRIT_IDX + 00H).

[Payment device control start determination processing]
71 shows the payout device control start determination processing (step A20) in the main processing shown in FIG. 67. In the payout device control start determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a payout excess error (step A61). The overpayment error is an error that occurs when the cumulative value of the number of balls paid out in prize balls or ball lending exceeds the number of balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (for example, 16). When this overpayment error is occurring (step A61; Y), the payout device control start determination processing ends. If the overpayment error is not occurring (step A61; N), it is determined whether or not a ball rental request has been detected (step A62). A ball rental request is a request for paying out a ball input from a card unit based on a player's operation, and a ball rental request has been detected. It is a state until the ball lending operation based on (3) is started.

  If the ball lending request has been detected (step A62; Y), the ball lending control mode flag is set in the payout device control mode flag (step A74), and the payout device control start determination processing ends. Since the detection of the ball lending request is confirmed before the prize ball payout process described below, the ball lending control mode flag is set by overwriting the prize ball control mode flag. That is, when both the prize ball payout and the ball rental payout are feasible, the ball loan payout is prioritized.

  When the ball lending request has not been detected (step A62; N), it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout start prohibition state (step A63). The prize ball payout start prohibition state is a state in which the start of payout of prize balls is prohibited, and the frame radio wave error set based on the detection of the radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor 84 is occurring, or the sensor or the proximity is set. Applicable when a switch abnormality is set, which is set based on the detection of an abnormal state where the switch lead wire is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floated. . When the prize ball payout start prohibition state (step A63; Y), the payout device control start determination processing ends. If it is not in the prize ball payout start prohibited state (step A63; N), it is determined whether or not there is a received command in the reception buffer area of the RAM 211C (step A64).

  If there is a receive command in the receive buffer area (step A64; Y), the number of received commands in the command receive counter is updated by -1 (step A65), and the receive buffer corresponding to the command read index indicating the area from which the command is to be read next. The area is calculated (step A66). Then, the received command is read from the calculated receive buffer area (step A67), the read receive buffer area is cleared (step A68), and the command read index is updated by -1 within the range of 0 to 15 (step A69). .

  Next, it is determined whether the received command has a normal value (step A70). In the payout control device 200, the validity is determined in the process corresponding to the command, in addition to the determination of the validity when the command is received. If the received command is not a normal value (step A70; N), the process returns to step A64. In this case, the read command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step A70; Y), the number of prize balls corresponding to the received command is added to the remaining number of game balls (step A71), and the process returns to step A64. The remaining number of game balls is the number of prize balls that have not yet been paid out among the prize balls set to be paid out based on the payout command.

  When the process from step A64 to A71 is repeated and there is no received command in the receive buffer area (step A64; N), it is determined whether the remaining number of game balls is 0 (step A72), and the remaining number of game balls is found. When it is 0 (step A72; N), the payout device control start determination processing ends. When the remaining number of game balls is not 0 (step A72; Y), the prize ball control mode flag is set in the payout device control mode flag (step A73), and the payout device control start determination processing is ended.

  That is, the card unit serves as a ball lending signal control means for outputting a ball lending command (ball lending request) relating to the discharge of the ball lending based on the operation of the player. Also, the payout control device 200 sends a prize ball command (payout command) transmitted from the game control means (game control device 100) and a ball lending command (ball lending request) sent from the ball lending signal control means (card unit). Based on, the payout control means for performing payout control of the game balls is formed.

[Payout busy signal editing process]
FIG. 72 shows the payout busy signal editing process (step A22) in the main process shown in FIG. In the payout busy signal editing process, ON data of the payout busy signal is set when the prize ball payout control cannot be started (step A97), and the payout busy signal is turned off when the prize ball payout control can be started. The data is set (step A96).

  The case where the prize ball payout control cannot be started means that the payout is prohibited (step A91; Y), and that the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode are not in the standby operation (step A92). ; Y), the shoot-ball out switch is in an unconfirmed state (step A93; Y), the overflow switch is in an unconfirmed state (step A94; Y), and the receive buffer area is full (step A95; This is the case where any one of Y) is set.

  In addition, the payout prohibition state is when there are errors such as shooting ball out error (ball out), overflow error (overflow), frame radio error, switch error error, overpayment error etc. Is set to. The undetermined state of the switch is a state in which the detected state of the switch has not been determined. The detection state of the switch is set when the state in which the switch detects an error state or a normal state (on or off) continues for a specified time. Since the detection state of the switch is reset when the power is turned on, the detection state of the switch remains undetermined until the switch remains in the error state or the normal state for a specified time. If an error status is detected for a specified period of time and the switch detection status is confirmed as an error status, the error status is released if no error status is detected for a predetermined time. It is supposed to do.

  The game control device 100 does not transmit a payout command when the payout busy signal is ON. Since the payout control device 200 does not have a backup function at the time of a power failure, if a payout command is sent one after another during the payout of prize balls or rental balls or in a situation where the payout cannot be paid out, the prize will be paid in the event of a power failure. The memory of the number of balls disappears and it becomes impossible to pay out accurately. Further, the reception buffer area for storing the command may be full. Therefore, the payout command indicates whether or not the payout command can be received so that the payout command can be received only when the payout control can be started immediately.

  Since the command is not transmitted from the game control device 100 when the command cannot be processed in this way, basically, the reception buffer area becomes full, or a new command is issued when the reception buffer area is full. Never receive. Therefore, if a new command is received while the reception buffer area is full, some abnormality has occurred in the game control device 100 or the payout control device 200, that a fraudulent act has been performed, or noise has occurred. It is highly possible that the new command is not a normal command because it may have been affected.

  Therefore, in the payout control device 200, when a new command is received while the reception buffer area is full, the new command is discarded. In other words, the oldest command stored in the receive buffer area is likely to be the command that was sent before the abnormal condition occurred, and if the oldest command is overwritten with a new command, the normal command May be overwritten with an invalid command. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the game by discarding a new command that is likely to be an illegal command.

  In FIG. 73, the outline of the process at the time of command reception in the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is shown. In the effect control device 300, the command received from the game control device 100 is stored in the register of the CPU 311 (step S11), and then stored in the received command area which is a dedicated area of the RAM 322 (step S12). Then, the command is fetched from the received command area, which is a dedicated area, into the register of the CPU 311 to check the validity (step S13).

  If the received command is not a normal value (step S14; N), the received command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step S14; Y), the address of the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is calculated (step S15). If the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is not full (step S16; N), the command is stored at the calculated address. If the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is full (step S16; Y), the new command is overwritten and stored in the address where the oldest command is stored.

  In the payout control device 200, the command received from the game control device 100 is stored in the register of the CPU 211A (step S21), and then the validity is confirmed on the register (step S22). When the received command is not a normal value (step S23; N), the received command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step S23; Y), the address of the reception buffer area which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C is calculated (step S24). Then, if the reception buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is not full (step S25; N), the command is stored in the calculated address (step S26). If the reception buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is full (step S25; Y), the received command is discarded (step S28).

  As described above, the process of the command received from the game control device 100 is different between the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200. Since the payout control device 200 confirms the validity of the command on the register of the CPU 211A, the number of processes is small and high-speed processing is possible. There are few types of commands to the payout control device 200, it is easy to check the validity, and there is no inconvenience even if they are processed on the register. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 stores the received command in the dedicated area of the RAM 322 and then confirms the validity. The number and types of commands transmitted to the production control device 300 are larger than those of the payout control device 200, and the process of confirming the validity is complicated. Therefore, once the command is stored in the RAM 322, the validity is confirmed. I am trying to ensure that the process can be performed.

  If the command storage area is full, the payout control device 200 discards the new command. As described above, the command storage area does not normally fill up, it is an abnormal state, and the new command is likely to be an illegal command. If the payout is made by such an illegal command, the payout amount may be larger than planned. In particular, since it is possible that a large amount of commands are transmitted due to fraudulent acts, it is possible to prevent fraudulent payouts by discarding new commands.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300 replaces the new command with the oldest command. In the effect control device 300 as well, the command storage area does not normally fill up, and it is possible that the command storage area is in some abnormal state. When the command is received, the contents of the command have not been analyzed yet and may be an important command. Therefore, even if the command storage area is full, a new command is saved and the necessary command Is prevented from being discarded. Also, it is more likely that the new command will be more relevant to the current situation than the old command, and the old command is often no longer needed, so be sure to save the new command. ing.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is configured to regularly transmit game machine status commands 1 and 2 including information regarding the presence / absence of an abnormality in the game machine. If there is no space in the command storage area, this command is issued. It is possible that a plurality of gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 are stored. The gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 show the current status of the most recently received command, and there is no need for the old command, so there is no problem even if they are discarded by overwriting. Even if the newest gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are discarded by overwriting, since they are transmitted regularly, there is no problem in grasping the gaming machine status.

  In addition, here, the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 have been described, but the same processing can be applied to other sub-control devices that receive information from the game control device 100. In this case, depending on the property of the slave control device, either the same process as the effect control device 300 or the same process as the payout control device 200 is selected. Further, the command processing method is not limited to a control device that receives a command from the game control device 100, and any command control device that receives a command from another control device can apply such a command processing method. Is.

  From the above, in the gaming machine capable of executing the game on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined condition and paying out the game medium on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined payout condition, the game control means for controlling the game as a whole (the game control device 100). ), Production control means (production control device 300) for controlling production based on production information transmitted from the game control means, and payout control for controlling the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control device 200), the effect control means includes effect information storage means (RAM322) having an effect information storage area (command buffer area) for storing the effect information received, and unprocessed effect information. When new effect information is received when there is no space in the effect information storage area, the oldest effect information is discarded and new effect information is sent. The payout / payout control means includes a payout information storage means having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information, and receives new payout information due to unprocessed payout information in a state where the payout information storage area is full. In this case, the new payout information is discarded. Therefore, it is possible to deal with the case where the received command cannot be stored, according to each control means, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. It can be anything.

  Further, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the satisfaction of a predetermined payout condition, a game control means (game control device 100) for integrally controlling a game, 1st subordinate control means (for example production control device 300) which forms subordinate control means which controls on the basis of the information which is transmitted from game control means, and 2nd subordinate control means (for example payout control device 200), is provided. The first sub-control unit and the second sub-control unit each include an information storage unit (RAM 322, RAM 211C) having an information storage area having a plurality of areas for sequentially storing the received information. The second sub-control means is provided with a larger number of areas, and when the first control means receives new information when there is no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information, Information in the area in which the new information is stored is discarded, new information is stored in the area, and the second control means receives new information when there is no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information. Means that the new information is discarded. Therefore, since it is possible to deal with the case where the received command cannot be stored according to the number of storage areas in each control means, it is possible to minimize the influence on the progress of the game. Can be appropriate.

  Further, the first sub-control means is an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on effect information that is information transmitted from the game control means, and the second sub-control means is the game control means. The payout control means (payout control device 200) controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information forming the information transmitted from Therefore, it is possible to deal with the case where the received command cannot be stored, according to each control means, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. It can be anything.

  In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the satisfaction of a predetermined payout condition, the game control means for integrally controlling the game and the game control means are transmitted. Information having an information storage area including a plurality of areas for sequentially storing received information, the auxiliary control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) performing control based on the information. A storage unit (RAM 322, RAM 211C) is provided, and a write index indicating a region for storing new information, a read index indicating a region for reading next information, and information indicating the number of regions at which information is currently stored. And a counter (command reception counter). Therefore, the writing area and the reading area of the information can be appropriately grasped, the information of the empty area at the present time can be obtained, the reading and writing of the information can be appropriately managed, and the control processing can be efficiently performed.

  Further, the sub-control means, the effect control means for controlling the effect based on the effect information forming the information transmitted from the game control means, and the payout of the game medium based on the payout information forming the information transmitted from the game control means. The payout control means for controlling, and the effect control means includes, as information storage means, effect information storage means (RAM322) having an effect information storage area which is an information storage area for storing the received effect information, When new effect information is received when the effect information counter forming the counter is in a state indicating that there is no space in the effect information storage area, the information in the area in which the oldest effect information is stored is discarded and New payout information is stored in the area, and the payout control means has, as the information storage means, a payout information storage area which is an information storage area for storing the received payout information. When new payout information is received when the payout information counter, which is equipped with the information storage means (RAM 211C) and is an information counter, indicates that the payout information storage area is full, the new payout information is received. Will be discarded. Therefore, it is possible to deal with the case where the received command cannot be stored, according to each control means, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. It can be anything.

  In addition, a game control means for controlling a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, generates a state advantageous to the player. , A production control unit that controls production based on production information transmitted from the game control unit, and the game control unit includes, as the production information, information on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Information can be periodically transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is provided with effect information storage means having an effect information storage area for storing the received effect information, and the effect information is stored in the effect information storage area by unprocessed effect information. When new effect information is received in a state where there is no space, the oldest effect information is discarded and new effect information is stored. Only the latest gaming machine status information that is periodically transmitted is necessary, and the old gaming machine status information is no longer required. Therefore, since it is possible to minimize the influence on the progress of the game in the case where the received command cannot be stored, it is possible to appropriately deal with the malfunction.

  Further, the game control means is adapted to periodically transmit the game machine status information only when an abnormality has occurred in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command transmission frequency from increasing in a normal case, and reduce the control load. In addition, when an abnormality has occurred, it is transmitted periodically, so that no problem occurs even if a command is missed, and it is possible to reliably notify the effect control means of the abnormality.

  Further, the game control means is configured to periodically transmit the game machine state information over a certain period when the abnormality that occurred in the game machine is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the effect control means that the abnormality has been resolved.

  Further, the effect control means, an effect operation processing means (CPU 311) which is an operation processing means for performing effect operation processing, an effect information storage means (RAM 322) having an effect information storage area for storing the received effect information, When the effect information is received, the effect information is stored in the effect information storage area after the effect information is stored on the register of the effect calculation processing means without performing a predetermined process for the effect information. The payout control unit performs a predetermined process on the effect information, and the payout control unit has a payout calculation processing unit (CPU 211A) that is a calculation processing unit that performs a calculation process for payout and a payout information storage having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information. A means (RAM 211C) is provided, and when the payout information is received, predetermined processing is performed on the payout information on the register of the payout calculation processing means. And thus which is adapted to store the payout information to the payout information storage area after performing. The type and content range of the received command differs depending on the control means, and the processing of the received command can be efficiently performed by making the processing suitable for each control means.

  Further, the predetermined process is a legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the performance information or the payout information, and if the legitimacy determination process determines that the performance information or the payout information is invalid, the performance information or the payout information is discarded. This is what I did. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to an invalid command. The validity determination process for determining the validity of the effect information and the validity determination process for determining the validity of the payout information may be different processes or the same process.

  In addition, the production control means, when receiving the production information, stores the production information in a dedicated area of the production information storage area, then performs a validity determination process on the production information, and the validity determination process is valid. When it is determined that the effect information is stored in the storage area of the effect information storage area, the payout control means, when receiving the payout information, the payout information regarding the payout information on the register of the payout calculation processing means. This means that the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area after the validity determination process is performed. Therefore, since it is stored in the storage area only when the validity is confirmed, unnecessary commands are not stored in the storage area, and the control processing can be efficiently advanced.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines using the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls.

  Further, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Gaming Machine 100 Game Control Device (Game Control Means)
300 production control device (production control means)
322 RAM (production information storage means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and, when the result of the game is a special result, generates a state advantageous to the player.
A game control means for controlling the game as a whole,
And effect control means for controlling effect based on effect information transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means,
As the effect information, it is possible to periodically transmit the game machine state information including information regarding the occurrence of an abnormality in the game machine to the effect control means,
The effect control means,
The production information storage unit having a production information storage area for storing the received production information,
When new production information is received in a state where there is no space in the production information storage area due to the unprocessed production information, the oldest production information is discarded and the new production information is stored. And a gaming machine. The game control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine status information is periodically transmitted only when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. The game control means,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine state information is periodically transmitted over a certain period when an abnormality that has occurred in the gaming machine is resolved.